robodrill 01

FANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCe
FANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCLe

FANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCSe
FANUC ROBODRILL α-T21iCe
FANUC ROBODRILL α-T21iCLe
FANUC ROBODRILL α-T21iCSe
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–85014EN/01
The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is :
Product Name Abbreviation
FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe) α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe)

Controller : A04B–0079–B241
A04B–0079–B251
FANUC Series 18i–MB
Mechanical Unit : A04B–0079–B111
A04B–0079–B112
A04B–0079–B113
A04B–0079–B114
S No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

S All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the

various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,
or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in
this manual should be regarded as “impossible”.
B–85014EN/01 PREFACE
PREFACE
1. INTENDED USE OF THE PRODUCT

The FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series are vertical drilling
machine that operates under control of a CNC (computer numerical
control unit). It can be used for drilling, tapping, and light milling.
It should not be used for any other purposes.
2. DEFINITION OF USERS
2.1 Operator
In this document, the term operator refers to a person who operates
a machine. The operator must read this manual to understand the
contents of the manual. If the operator uses the machine without
understanding the contents of the manual, the operator or people
around the operator may be in serious danger. The operator is not
allowed to carry out any maintenance that involves :
(1) Any work that becomes possible only after a cover whose removal
requires a tool (fixed cover) is removed.
(2) Installing the machine or moving it from one place to another
2.2 Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive

maintenance
This person should have completed an advanced course at the
FANUC Robomachine School or have the equivalent knowledge and
should also be qualified by the company or organization to which that
person belongs.
The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive
maintenance must observe the cautions described
below :
Cautions that Person in charge of routine maintenance and
preventive maintenance must observe during maintenance
1. Before starting to remove a cover whose removal requires use of a tool
(fixed cover), switch off the power to the machine.
2. Before switching on the power to the machine with its cover removed,
make sure that nobody is beside the machine.
3. Before starting to run the machine with its cover removed, make sure that
anything extraneous, like a tool, is not left in the machine.
4. When adjusting the machine electrically with is cover removed, be careful
for shock hazards. Be sure to use electrically insulated tools (such as a
plastic screwdriver).
5. The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive mainte-
nance shall not be engaged in replacement of any electrical components
other than fuses and memory backup batteries. Only the maintenance
engineer is allowed to replace such electrical components.
p–1
PREFACE B–85014EN/01
2.3 Maintenance Engineer

This person should have sufficient mechanical or electrical
knowledge to be capable of maintenance and have also completed a
maintenance course at the FANUC FA School or FANUC
Robomachine School. Alternatively, the person should have the
equivalent knowledge and should also be qualified by the company
or organization to which that person belongs. Maintenance engineer
are allowed to be engaged in :
(1) Installing the machine and moving it from one place to another
(2) Repairing the machine (such as replacing mechanical
components, and electrical components requiring setting or
adjustment after replacement)
The maintenance engineer must also observe the cautions described

above. Experienced maintenance engineer especially are alerted to
accidents that may occur from negligence or carelessness.
3. ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is :
Product Name Abbreviation

Controller : A04B–0079–B241
A04B–0079–B251
FANUC Series 18i–MB
Mechanical Unit : A04B–0079–B111
A04B–0079–B112
A04B–0079–B113
A04B–0079–B114
The following manuals are related to this machine :

(1) FANUC ROBODRILL a-T14iCe/T21iCe OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–85014EN) : This manual. Describes how to operate
and maintain this machine.
(2) FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–MB OPERATOR’S
MANUAL (B–63534EN) :
Describes how to operate numerical control (NC)
units and how to prepare programs.
(3) FANUC ROBODRILL a-T14iCe/T21iCe MAINTENANCE
MANUAL (B–85015EN) :
Describes alarms, troubleshooting, and replacement
of parts.
(4) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–
MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–63525EN):
Describes troubleshooting and adjustment of NC
units.
Before using this machine, be sure to read the necessary part of manual
(1).
For daily handling or for reference, use manuals (1) and (2).
Use manuals (3) and (4) for troubleshooting, replacement of parts, and
adjustment of the machine.
The NC unit used for this machine is an exclusive controller used for
α–T14iCe/T21iCe.
p–2
B–85014EN/01 PREFACE
For the basic specification and the optional specification to which the NC
unit is applicable, refer to the principal specification attached to this
manual and the copy of the order specification.
The description of manuals (1) and (3) has priority over that of manuals
(2) and (4). When there are differences between the description of the
manuals, the description in manuals (1) and (3) applies.
This manual has the following contents :
SAFETY Explains safety precautions, cautions, and
PRECAUTIONS: warning labels of the machine.
I OUTLINE : Description of what can be done with this
machine. The names of the parts and the
description of the equipment and devices used
with this machine are given.
II ROUTINE The flow of operation for machining is
OPERATIONS : described.
III DETAILED Each of the machining operations that can be
OPERATIONS : done with this machine is described in detail.
IV INSTALLATION : Instructions for initially installing or moving
this machine are given.
V MAINTENANCE : Routine inspection to be done daily before
starting machining, periodic inspection, and
replacement of the expendable parts are
described.
APPENDIXES : The principal specification, various figures
and tables, and other useful information are
compiled.
Before using this machine for the first time, read Chapters I and II. If the
machine has been installed yet, read Chapter IV. Also, before moving this
machine, be sure to read Chapter V. Prepare a schedule for inspection and
maintenance.
Individual operation on this machine is described in Chapter III. For NC
operation, however, refer to manual (2).
In this manual the soft keys, the keys on the MDI operator’s panel, and
the keys on the machine operator’s panel are indicated as shown below.
(For details on each key, see Section 1–2).
D Soft keys displayed on the bottom of the screen : Enclosed in [ ]

(Example) [PARAMETER], [ALARM]
D Keys on the operator’s panel (function keys, edit keys, and so forth) :
Enclosed in < >
(Example) <CANCEL>, <INPUT>
p–3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–85014EN/01
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Before using the machine, be sure to read this manual and understand the
contents of the manual thoroughly. Using the machine with insufficient
understanding can lead to an accident.
First, read this chapter on safety (SAFETY PRECAUTIONS). After fully
understanding the contents of this chapter, use the machine.
1. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE

The ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe adopts a door interlock system that
stops the machine when the door is open. This is to protect the
operator from dangerous situations. The door interlock system
consists of an electromagnetic lock switch, control circuit, and
software.
A light that lights the machining area can be installed inside the splash
guard. The following provides an outline of the machine and the
safety equipment.
s–1
B–85014EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Electromagnetic lock switch Internal Light

Fixed cover
Operator’s
panel
Fixed cover
Window
Front door Fixed cover
α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe
Electromagnetic lock switch Internal Light
Fixed cover
Operator’s
panel
Fixed cover
Window
Front door Fixed cover
α–T14(21)iCSe
s–2
(a) Electromagnetic lock switch

The electromagnetic lock switch is installed in the upper part of the
front door of the splash guard.
When a door open operation is performed, the spindle and X–, Y–,
and Z–axis operations stop. After the spindle and X–, Y–, and Z–axis
operations have stopped, the door lock is released, allowing the
operator to open the door.
When the machine is delivered, a key to release the door lock is
supplied with the machine. This key is used to open the door when
the power supply is not connected to the machine. After installing the
machine, keep the key in the maintenance section. Never hand this
key to the operator, and never leave the key inserted in the machine.
During machine operation, never open the door by using this key.
(b) Fixed covers
Fixed covers are installed around the movable part of the machine.
2. CAUTIONS
When operating the machine, read specifications and other manuals
on safety to ensure safety.
a) Mechanical danger
Handle workpieces with care.
(1) Be careful with sharp edges and burrs of workpieces.

A workpiece will have sharp edges and burrs especially after it
is machined. Be careful not to get cuts when handling it. Wear
a protector such as gloves for safety.
(2) Fasten a workpiece onto a jig securely.

When mounting a workpiece on a jig on the table, be sure to fix
it to the securely. If not, the workpiece may come off the jig and
fly away when it is machined. This is very dangerous.
(3) Do not machine a flammable workpiece.

Some workpiece are flammable. Do not process such workpieces
on he cutting machine, or otherwise they may catch fire.
(4) When mounting or dismounting a heavy workpiece, use a crane

or the like.
The crane or the like shall be used to lift anything that is
apparently heavy (20 kg or more), cannot be held by hands, or you
feel heavy when you try to lift it.
Handle cutters with care.
(1) When using or exchanging a cutter, be careful not to get cuts on

its sharp edge. When handing a cutter, wear a protector such as
gloves.
(2) When disposing of cutters, observe any regulations and rules

applicable to dangerous objects.
s–3
(3) A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, and

similarly a cutter may be hot immediately after it is used. If you
touch such objects directly with your hand, you may get burned.
This is true especially if no coolant is used when machining.
Wear a protector such as heat–resistant gloves, as required.
(4) Do not machine workpieces under such a machining condition

that sparks are caused to fly.
Check the machining condition, cutting fluid, material, and type
beforehand.
(5) Make sure that the cutter is fastened onto the securely. The cutter
shall be neither worn out nor broken.
(6) When mounting a tool on the turret, fasten it securely according

to the applicable instructions. If a tool is mounted incorrectly, if
may come off accidentally.
Carefully handle cuttings.
In handling cuttings, be careful not to hurt yourself. Wear protectors

such as gloves.
Be careful when operating the machine with the safety

door (front door) open.
The following manual operations are possible with the safety door
open.
D Movement along the X–, Y–, or Z–axis at 1.9 m/min or less
D Additional axis movement at 600 degrees/min or less
D Manual handle heed
D Spindle rotation speed at 100 min–1 or less
Do not get close to moving components such as table or turret when

the safety door (front door) is open.
Air blow operation can be turned on with the safety door open.
When turning on air blow operation with the safety door open, wear
safety goggles to protect the eyes from chips.
Be careful not to slip on coolants or lubricants

(grease or oil).
(1) If a coolant or lubricant gets to your hand, immediately wipe it

off with a rag.
If the hand is dirty with a coolant or lubricant, it is very slippery.
It is dangerous to operate the machine with such a slippery hand.
(2) A floor with a coolant or a lubricant on it is very slippery. It can

cause serious falls.
It a coolant or lubricant spills over around the machine,
immediately wipe it up. Make sure that metal chip are not
accumulated at the coolant outlet on the rear of the machine or in
the metal chip holder, so the coolant is not leaking.
s–4
b) Electrical danger
When performing maintenance work, turn off the

power.
(1) Be sure to turn off the power whenever performing maintenance

work.
(2) After maintenance work, re–install all removed parts including
screws.
c) Thermal danger
Always wear heat–resistant gloves when handling hot

objects.
A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, and

similarly a cutter may be hot immediately after it is used. If you touch
such objects by hand, you may get burned. This is true especially if
no coolant is used during machining.
Some components of the machine can also get hot. Be careful not to
touch them. When handling such hot objects, wear a protector such
as heat–resistant gloves. The following machine components can get
hot :
(1) Servo motor of each axis (such as X–, Y–, Z–, and additional
axes)
(2) Spindle motor
(3) Coolant motor
(4) Power line
(5) Heat generating sections (such as a transformer and heat sink)
in the NC cabinet
d) COOLANTS AND LUBRICANTS
Do not inhale, or expose any part of the body to,

coolants or lubricants (such as grease and oil).
Coolants and lubricants are very bad for your health, if you inhale, or
are exposed to, them. Take the following precautions. In case you
should have inhaled or touched directly any coolant or lubricant, get
the applicable treatment listed below.
Part of the body
Precaution Medical treatment
exposed
Respiratory organs Do not inhale vapor or mist. If you feel anything abnor-
(such as mouth and mal with your body, immedi-
nose) ately see a doctor and
receive medical treatment.
Skin (especially Do not touch directly as If a coolant or lubricant gets

one with a scratch much as possible. on your skin, wash it away
or a wound) with tap water or soapy
water. If you feel anything
abnormal with your body,
immediately see a doctor
and receive medical treat-
ment.
s–5
Part of the body

Precaution Medical treatment
exposed
Mucous Wear goggles to protect the If a coolant or lubricant gets

membrane eyes from any spattering in your eye, keep washing
(such as eyes) coolant or lubricant. the eye in sufficient running
tap water for 15 minutes or
longer. If you feel pain or
anything abnormal with the
eye, immediately see an
ophthalmologist (eye doc-
tor) and receive medical
treatment.
Digestive organs Be careful not to drink acci- If you have drunk a coolant
(such a mouth) dentally. or lubricant accidentally, do
not try to vomit it up.
Instead, see a doctor and
receive medical treatment.
Handle coolants and lubricants (grease and oil) with

care.
(1) Do NOT use flammable coolants.

Be careful that coolants and oil can catch fire even if they are not
flammable. Pay sufficient attention to the condition and way that
you use coolants and lubricants.
(2) When storing coolants and lubricants, handle them in the same
way as other petrochemical products.
When disposing of them, observe any regulations and rules
applicable to industrial wastes.
(3) Coolants become very harmful, when they get rotten.

Before a coolant gets rotten, exchange it with a new supply. If a
coolant is rotten, stop using it immediately, and exchange it with
a new supply.
(4) When handling coolants and lubricants, observe the instructions

from the manufacturers.
NOTE
With the ROBODRILL, nitrile rubber (NBR),
hydrogenerated nitrile rubber (HNBR), and fluororubber are
used as shielding and protection materials. Do not use a
coolant that can swell nitrile rubber (NBR), hydrogenerated
nitrile rubber (HNBR), and fluororubber.
Do not use a strong coolant that can peel off coating.
s–6
Use recommended lubricant.
The following lubricants are recommended:

Component to Timing of
Brand Manufacturer
be lubricated application
ALVANIA SHOWA SHELL GUIDE RAIL At the time of

GREASE NO. 1 SEKIYU K. K. TURRET GEAR maintenance
SPINDLE NOSE
ALVANIA GEAR
GREASE NO. 2
MULTEMP LRL KYODO YUSHI BALL SCREW

NO. 3 (X, Y, Z)
MOLY HD SUMICO SPINDLE TOOL When exchanging

GREASE CLAMP Tool clamp
SPRINGS springs
MOLYSPEED SUMICO TURRET MECH- When overhauling

GREASE NO. 1 ANISM INSIDE Turret mechanism
ARCANOL FAG SPINDLE BEAR- When exchanging

L74V ING Spindle bearings
ANTIRUST Nisseki Mitsubishi GUIDE RAIL At the time of

P- 1000 (X, Y, Z) packing,
TAPERED POR- transportation,
TION OF THE and storage.
ANTIRUST
SPINDLE
P- 3600
TABLE SURFACE
Super MULPUS Nisseki Mitsubishi GUIDE RAIL Replenish when

68 (X, Y, Z) the leavings in the
BALL SCREW pump becomes
UNIWAY 68 (X, Y, Z) scarce.
Mobil Vactra Oil Mobil Oil corp.
No.2
TETOLA OIL 68 SHOWA SHELL

SEKIYU K.K.
Tonna Oil T68
FEBIS K68 EXXON
s–7
Use recommended coolant.
The following coolants are recommended:

Type Manufacturer Brand
Nisseki Mitsubishi UNICUT TG20
IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. DAPHNE CUT
Oily AS–25F
SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. SPEED SC22A
Mobil Oil Corp. Bakumaru 15J
NIPPON OIL COMPANY UNISOLUBLE HD–M
UNISOLUBLE HD
IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. DAPHNE MILCOOL
SD
Water–soluble
SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. DROMUS OIL EPL
MOBIL OIL CORPORATION MOBIL MET 150
MOBIL MET 150
Yusiro Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Yusiroken EZ20
Even when recommended coolant is used, it may adversely affect

machine parts or coating depending on how the coolant is used.
Therefore, use coolant carefully.
When using coolant other than recommended coolants, pay special
attention to use conditions and a method. Some coolants may
adversely affect the human body, machine, and/or environment.
Be careful not to cause a fire.
(1) Do not machine workpieces under such a machining condition

that sparks can be caused to fly.
The operator shall check the machining condition, cutting fluid,
workpiece material, and cutter type beforehand.
(2) Do not machine flammable workpieces.
Some workpieces are mode of flammable materials. Before
machining a workpiece, check its material.
(3) Pay attention to coolants and oil.
Do NOT use flammable coolants or oil. Be careful that coolants
and oil can catch fire even if they are not flammable. Pay
sufficient attention to the condition and way that you use a
coolant or oil.
(4) Keep combustible and flammable substances away from the
machine.
Do not place flammables (such as paint thinner or gasoline)
around the machine.
Moreover, do not use a spray around the machine.
(5) Get a fire extinguisher on hand in the event of a fire.
e) Danger due to unreasonable forms
When installing the machine, provide service access

clearances.
When installing the machine, provide service access clearances.

When ascending to a high place, secure a footing.
s–8
When mounting or dismounting a 20–kg or heavier

workpiece or machine component, use a crane or the
like.
Use a crane or the like to lift anything that is apparently heavy, cannot
be held by hands, or you feel heavy when you try to lift it.
Do not work in an unnatural posture.
It is dangerous to work in an unnatural posture, reaching out to mount

or dismount a workpiece on the table when it is far away from you.
When working with a workpiece on the table, bring the table
sufficiently toward you beforehand so that you can work safety.
When working in a high place, use a ladder, and secure

a footing.
When working in a high place, use a ladder, and secure a footing.
f) CLOTHING
Always wear safe clothing when working.
Wear protective clothing.
Always wear a cap when working.
Long hair can be caught in machines. This is very dangerous.

Besides, long hair narrows your field of vision. Always wear a cap
when working.
Always wear safety shoes when working.
Wear safety shoes to protect the feet if anything drops on them.
When handling a cutter, workpiece, or metal chips,

wear gloves.
A machined workpiece has sharp edges and burrs. Be careful not to

get cuts when handling it. When using or exchanging a cutter, be
careful not to get cuts on its sharp edge. When handling metal chips,
be careful not to get cuts.
g) Cautions on power supply, instability, and functional impairment
Pay attention to the storage and packing methods.
When storing or packing the machine, observe the following:

(1) Secure the spindle top and table with fastening materials for
transportation.
(2) Apply rust resisting oil to portions that may rust.
s–9
(3) Secure the turret mechanism with nylon bands.

For details, see the chapters on the storage and packing methods in
this manual.
When lifting the machine, pay attention to the capacity

of the crane used.
When lifting the machine, pay attention to the balance of the machine.
Also, pay attention to the capacities of the crane and hook.
Machine weight: α–T14/21iCe 2000 kg
α–T14/21iCLe 2100 kg
α–T14/21iCSe 1950 kg
Do not handle the operator’s panel or display unit with

your hands in gloves.
If you handle the operator’s panel or display unit with your hands in
gloves, you may press the wrong key or more than one key at a time,
possibly causing the machine to run incorrectly or damaging the
workpiece, cutter, or even the machine. When pressing the keys on
the operator’s panel, do not wear gloves.
Install the machine on a flat, secure floor.
The floor on which the machine is to be installed shall:

(1) Withstand a load of 2 t without raising a problem (such as
deformation).
(2) Be flat, with no projection or dent.
(3) Be hard, without being deformed under a pressure of 1.5 Mpa
(15 kgf/cm2).
(4) Be smooth.
(5) Not deteriorate with time.
(6) Not deteriorate in an environment for everyday operation.
If the machine is installed in a place not meeting any condition above,
a failure can occur, possibly resulting in a dangerous situation.
Besides, it is impossible to make the most of the machine.
Perform inspections and maintenance to ensure

safety.
Inspections
Perform the following inspections periodically:
* Check that the cutter is attached to the arbor securely to allow
normal machining. The cutter must be free from wear and
breakage.
* If the jig is defective, a workpiece may come off. Check that
the jig is free from defects.
* When a hydraulic or pneumatic device is installed in the jig,
check whether appropriate pressure is supplied. If the pressure
is too low, a proper clamping force cannot be applied, which
allows the workpiece to come off the jig. If the pressure is too
high, the hydraulic or pneumatic device is damaged, and so the
jig does not work.
s–10
* Check that the leveling bolt is not floating from the mount.
* Press the emergency stop button to check that the machine
stops normally.
* Check that when a tool change is performed at a position where
no tool is present, an alarm is issued.
* Check that the Z–axis brake functions normally. Check that the
amount of the displacement on the Z–axis between before and
after the emergency stop button is pressed is 0.1 mm or less.
* Check that the door is locked.
* Check that the bolts fastening the fixing covers are tightened
securely.
* Check that machine operation is not obstructed by accumulated
cuttings.
* Check that cuttings accumulated at the exit of the coolant in the
rear part of the machine or in the receptacle of cuttings do not
cause coolant to leak out.
Maintenance
Perform the following maintenance operations periodically:
* Greasing the gear at the end of the spindle and turret gear:
Every 200 operation hours
* Greasing the LM guide block: Every 1000 operation hours
* Greasing the ball screws: Every 1000 operation hours
* Greasing the LM guide of the turret: Every 2000 operation
hours
* Replacing the coned disc spring: Every 1,000,000 times of tool
change
* Central lubricating device (optional): Add oil when the oil
level in the pump is low.
For details, see the chapter on maintenance in this manual.
Before opening the safety door, make sure that the

Z–axis dose not come down.
The Z–axis (spindle head) comes down once in a while because of the
defective Z–axis brake failing to work. Before opening the safety
door, make sure that the Z–axis does not come down.
When the safety door is open, be careful that the Z–axis may come
down.
While working underneath the Z–axis, place a wooden block between
the table and spindle head so that the Z–axis will not come down even
if the brake fails to work.
Fix a tool on the turret securely.
When fixing a tool on the turret, observe the applicable instructions

to fasten it tightly. If a tool is fixed incorrectly, it may come off
accidentally.
Be careful when opening the safety door with the

power switched off.
When opening the safety door with the power switched off, observe
the following :
s–11
(1) Make sure that the spindle is not rotating by inertia.

If the power is switched off when the spindle is rotating, it will
keep rotating by inertia because it is no longer under control.
(2) Make sure that the Z–axis (spindle head) does not come down.
The operator shall not open the NC cabinet door.
There are high voltages, hence shock hazards, inside the cabinet.
The operator shall not remove a fixed cover.
There are objects rotating or moving at high speed inside the fixed
cover. If it is removed, the following may occur :
D Danger of contacting with objects rotating or moving at high
speed
D Chance of a broken cutter or workpiece flying
D Change of a cutting chips flying
D Chance of a coolant spattering out of the machine
D Chance of noise leaking
Do not switch on the power to the machine when a

fixed cover is removed.
Before removing the fixed cover, switch of the power to the machine.
Before switching on the power after maintenance, attach the fixed
cover.
Do not switch on the power with a fixed cover removed. If it is

necessary to run the machine, for example, for maintenance with the
fixed cover removed, maintenance engineers and servicepersons
having accurate knowledge and competence for the applicable
maintenance items should do this maintenance.
When replacing maintenance parts, exercise care.
When replacing maintenance parts, use a specified method to replace

the parts properly. During replacement, the power must be off. If a
replacement is not performed properly, the machine will not operate
normally. After completing replacement, re–install all removed parts
including screws.
Before removing the Z–axis motor, be sure to fasten

the spindle top and table securely with packing
materials.
The Z–axis motor has a built–in brake. Therefore, if the Z–axis motor
is removed without fastening the spindle top and table with packing
materials, the Z–axis falls.
Be careful not to be caught with an automatic door.
If the machine is provided with an automatic door option, the safety

door is opened and closed automatically by program. Be careful not
to be caught with the automatic door when working. (Should you be
caught with the automatic door, resulting in excess force being
applied to it, the safety door is disconnected from the drive unit.)
s–12
h) Other cautions
Telescopic covers on the x and y axes
When leaving the machine unused for a long period of time. If it is

intended for dry cutting (cutting without using any coolant), apply
a lubricant to the surfaces of the telescopic covers by spraying or a
similar method. This will assure rust prevention and smooth sliding.
Bowl of the regulator
The bowl of the regulator is made of polycarbonate.

Do not use organic solvents or the like.
Avoid using the bowl in such an atmosphere that can deteriorate
polycarbonate.
Top cover
When using the cover to fully cover the entire machine, always use
a mist collector. Otherwise, the inside of the machine becomes full
of mist, which results in a failure.
3. WARNING LABELS
Warning labels have been attached where special care is required
during daily operation. The labels posted on the machine are
described below.
Keep all warning labels visible. Do not stain, scratch, or remove a
warning label.
Be aware of a tool on the turret or spindle head.
This warning label is on the turret cover.
During operation, the turret may suddenly rotate or the spindle may
be lowered. When approaching the table to exchange a workpiece,
for example, pull the table towards you. Stay away from the turret.
There are hazards from electrical shocks.
This warning label is on a door or other sections of the NC cabinet.
Any person other than the serviceperson shall not touch cables or
metal parts around the label.
s–13
Before opening the safety door, make sure that the machine is not
running.
Do not go inside the machine.
This warning label is on the front surface of the machine.
Even when the power to the machine is switched off, the spindle may
be rotating by inertia, or the Z–axis may drop because of a defective
brake.
(JAPAN and export standard)
Be careful not to get caught with the automatic door.
This warning label is on the front surface of the machine, if it is

equipped with the automatic door (option).
The automatic door (option) may move suddenly by program.
* If a warning label is missing, request one from a nearby FANUC

service station or dealer.
s–14
B–85014EN/01 Table of Contents
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
I. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 USE OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2. PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1 MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2 CONTROLLER RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.3 VIEW AND COMPONENTS OF THE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4. BASIC OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.1 SCREEN SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1.1 Switching between the QUICK Screen and CNC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1.2 CNC Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2 ENTERING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.2.1 Arrangement of the Letter Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5. TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6. JIGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7. COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
II. INSTALLATION
1. CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.1 PREPARATION BEFORE TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2 TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.1 INSTALLING LEVELING BOLTS AND BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.2 REMOVING THE EYEBOLTS FOR LIFTING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.3 REMOVING THE PACKING PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4 CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.1 Cabling and Phase Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.2 Setting of Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
c–1
Table of Contents B–85014EN/01
3.5 CONNECTING THE COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3.6 REMOVAL OF CORROSION PREVENTIVE GREASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.7 MOUNTING A Z–AXIS MOTOR AT MACHINE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.8 LEVEL ADJUSTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.9 MOUNTING TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.10 INSTALLING THE COOLANT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.11 Y–AXIS TELESCOPIC COVER (Y–COVER F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4. PACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
III. ROUTINE OPERATIONS

1. OPERATING POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2.1 SWITCHING POWER ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.2 SWITCHING POWER OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3. EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.1 LOCKING THE SAFETY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.2 RESTRICTIONS ON THE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE WITH THE SAFETY
DOOR OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.3 IF THE SAFETY DOOR IS UNLOCKED DURING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.4 OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOOR WHEN THE POWER IS OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.5 SWITCHING OF SAFETY DOOR LOCK CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.6 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5. MOUNTING TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6. MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7. COOLANT SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
8. PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9. TRIAL RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10.AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

10.1 STARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.2 STOPPING AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10.3 RESTARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
11.POWER SHUTOFF METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

11.1 AIR SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
c–2
11.2 ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
IV. DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
1.2 CONSTITUTION OF QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.2.2 Descriptions of Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
1.2.3 Screen Switching Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1.2.3.1 Soft Key–triggered Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1.2.3.2 Screen Number and PAGE Key Triggered Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1.2.3.3 MENU OPERATION Key–triggered Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
1.3 EXPLANATION OF EACH SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
1.3.1 Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
1.3.2 Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
1.3.3 Coordinate/Tool Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.3.4 Data I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
1.3.5 Tool Life Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
1.3.6 Pallet Setting Screen (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
1.3.7 Automatic Operation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
1.3.8 Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
1.3.9 Sequence Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
1.3.10 MAINTENCE/SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
1.3.11 DIAGNOSIS/ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2. CREATING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

2.1 EDITING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
2.1.1 Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
2.1.2 Modifying a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2.1.3 Deleting a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2.1.4 Checking Program Nos. in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2.1.5 Calling a Program in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2.2 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
2.2.2 Spindle Speed Function (S Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
2.2.3 Miscellaneous Function (M Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
2.2.4 Tool Function (T Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2.2.5 Spindle Orientation Function (M19 Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
2.2.6 Rigid Tapping Cycle (Function M29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
2.3 PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

3.1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.1.1 NC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.1.2 PMC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3.2 CHANGING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.3 CHANGING OFFSET DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.4 CHANGING WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3.5 CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
3.5.1 Custom Macro Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
c–3
3.5.2 Setting and Displaying Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

4.1 MANUAL OPERATION OF THE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.2 AUTOMATIC DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.3 AXIS MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

5.1 MDI RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5.1.1 MDI Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5.2 MEMORY RUNNING (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5.2.1 Settings for Memory Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5.2.2 Memory Running Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.3 REMOTE RUNNING (REMOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.3.1 Settings for Remote Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.3.2 Remote Running Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.4 SETTINGS AND OPERATIONS OF AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
5.4.1 Single Block (SINGL BLOCK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
5.4.2 Restarting Automatic Running After Feed Hold or Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.4.3 Manual Running Execution During Automatic Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.4.4 MDI Command Execution During Automatic Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.4.5 Feedrate Override Dial (FEEDRATE OVERRIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
5.4.6 M01 Stop (OPT STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
5.4.7 Optional Block Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.4.8 Rapid Traverse Rate Override (TRVRS LOW, TRVRS 25%, TRVRS 100%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6. TOOL CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

6.1 TOOL CHANGE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
6.2 COMMANDS WITH M CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
6.3 “TOOL CHANGE” KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.4 MEASURES WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS DURING TOOL CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
7. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

7.1 ROTATION OF THE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.1.1 Method Using the M Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.1.2 Method Using the Spindle Key (Manual) on the Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.1.3 Spindle Rotation When the Safety Door is Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.2 SPINDLE OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.3 SPINDLE LOAD METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
7.4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
7.5 SPINDLE MOTOR CHARACTERISTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES . . . . . . . . 188

8.1 CNC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.1.1 Alarm Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.1.2 Operator Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.2 QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.2.1 Common to Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.2.2 Diagnose/Alarm Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
c–4
8.3 COMMON TO CNC SCREEN AND QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9. RELEASING OVERTRAVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10.RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
11.INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

11.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
11.2 DETAILS OF THE RELATED PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
12.QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

12.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.2 FEATURES AND NOTES OF QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.2.1 Features of QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.3 QUICK EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
12.3.1 Procedure for Displaying QUICK EDITOR Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
12.3.2 Browse Mode and Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12.3.3 Selecting an Edit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12.4 INPUT FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
12.4.1 Entering Alphabetic Characters and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
12.4.2 Simple Input of G and M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
12.4.3 Simple Input of Words by Input Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12.4.4 Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12.5 EDITING FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
12.5.1 Selecting the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
12.5.2 Deleting the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12.5.3 Registering the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12.5.4 Copy and Move (by Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
12.5.5 Cursor Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
12.5.6 Search for the Specified Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
12.5.7 Entering a Macro Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12.5.8 Entering a Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12.5.9 Setting and Cancel of Continuous Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12.5.10 Inserting a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12.5.11 Deleting a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12.5.12 Setting of Inserting or Overwriting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12.5.13 Selecting the Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12.5.14 Screen Change and Program Selection after Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.A.P iM) . . . . . . . . . . . 222

13.1 OVERVIEW (SUPER C.A.P iM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
13.2 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
13.2.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
13.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
13.3 SETTING SEVERAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
13.3.1 Cutting Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
13.3.2 Tool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
13.3.3 Pre–Tool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
13.3.4 Tool Geometry Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
13.3.5 Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
c–5
13.4 CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

13.5 MACHINING PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
13.5.1 Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alteration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
13.5.2 Optimal Process Editing Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
13.5.3 Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alteration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
13.6 MACHINING PROGRAM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
13.6.1 Tool Path Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
13.6.2 Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
13.7 NC STATEMENT OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
13.7.1 NC Statement Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
13.8 DATA I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
13.9 STANDARD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
13.9.1 Cutting Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
13.9.2 Tool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
13.9.3 Pre–Tool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
13.9.4 Default File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
14.AI TOOL MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

14.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
14.2 TOOL LIFE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
14.3 SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
14.4 TOOL GROUP CREATION AND AUTOMATIC TOOL EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
14.4.1 Setting a Tool Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
14.4.2 Program Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
14.4.3 Registering a Tool Length Compensation Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
14.5 CONFIRMING THE CURRENT STATUS AND CLEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
14.6 SUPPLEMENT TO PROGRAM COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
14.7 ALARM MESSAGES DISPLAYED BY THE AI TOOL MONITOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
14.8 SIGNAL OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
15.EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

15.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
15.2 SETTING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
15.3 OUTPUT SIGNAL CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
15.4 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
15.4.1 Detailled Description of Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
15.5 EXTERNAL INTERFACE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
15.6 EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
15.7 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
15.8 RELAY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
15.8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
15.8.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
15.8.2.1 Internal connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
15.8.2.2 Pin allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
15.8.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
15.8.3.1 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
15.8.3.2 Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
15.8.3.3 Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
c–6
15.9 USER TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

15.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
15.9.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
15.9.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
15.9.3.1 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
15.9.3.2 Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
15.10 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
15.10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
15.10.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
15.10.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
15.10.3.1Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
15.10.3.2Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
15.11 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
15.11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
15.11.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
15.11.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
15.11.3.1Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
15.11.3.2Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
16.Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . 351

16.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
16.2 ENABLING THE Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . 353
16.3 ADJUSTING THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
16.3.1 History of the Amounts of Estimated Thermal Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
16.3.2 Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
17.AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUT–OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
18.COOLANT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

18.1 COOLANT UNIT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
18.2 MACHINE CLEANING COOLANT CONTROL (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
19.BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
20.OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
21.INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
22.STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
23.ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

23.1 SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
23.2 OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
23.3 CALCULATING THE FLEXIBLE FEED GEAR (DETECTION MULTIPLY DMR) . . . . . . . . . . 376
23.4 GRID SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
23.5 REMOVING AUXILIARY AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
23.6 SERVO PARAMETERS (STANDARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
23.7 INDEX TABLE FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
c–7
23.8 ADDITIONAL AXIS CABLE FOR THE INDEX TABLE

(JAPAN AND EXPORT STANDARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
23.8.1 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
23.8.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
23.8.3 Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table (4th axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
24.AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

24.1 COMMAND FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
24.2 COMPENSATION METHOD BY USING AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT . . 412
24.3 MEASURING LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
24.4 PARAMETERS AND MACRO VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
24.5 ALARM MESSAGES AND RELEASING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
24.6 FLOWCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
24.7 MACRO PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
25.SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

25.1 OUTLINE OF THE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
25.2 USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
25.3 SETTING THE SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
25.4 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
25.5 RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTINGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
26.FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

26.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
26.2 SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
26.2.1 Setting Up Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
26.2.2 Setting Up FACTOLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
26.2.3 Setting NC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
26.3 LOGGING DATA FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
26.4 SWITCHING TO FACTOLINK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
26.5 SELECT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
26.6 LOGGING DATA FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
27.HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . 444

27.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
27.2 STARTING AND ENDING THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
27.3 DNC OPERATION USING THE DNC OPERATION MANAGEMENT PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . 445
28.CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

28.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
28.1.1 Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
28.1.2 Coolant Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
28.1.3 Center–through Pump Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
28.2 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
28.2.1 Selecting a Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
28.2.2 Coolant Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
28.3 APPEARANCE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE COOLANT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
c–8
28.3.1 Appearance of the Coolant Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

28.3.2 Names and Functions of the Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
28.4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
28.4.1 Notes on Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
28.4.2 Installation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
28.4.3 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
28.4.4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
28.4.5 Checking Operation After Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
28.5 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
28.5.1 Command M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
28.5.2 Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
28.5.3 Commands in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
28.6 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
28.6.1 Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
28.6.2 Cleaning the #150 Suction Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
28.6.3 Replacing the Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
28.6.4 Dry Run After Replacement of the Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
28.6.5 Adjusting the Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
28.6.6 Other Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
28.7 MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
28.7.1 Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
28.7.2 Other Maintenance Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
28.8 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT AND COMPRESSED AIR . . . . . . 468
28.8.1 Coolant Circuit Diagram of Center–through Coolant Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
28.8.2 Compressed Air Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
28.9 CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
28.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
28.9.2 M codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
28.9.3 Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
28.9.4 Commands in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
28.9.5 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
28.9.6 Alarm Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
28.9.7 Parameters (PMC Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
28.9.8 DI/DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
28.9.9 Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
28.10 ELECTRIC CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER THROUGH COOLANT . . . . . . . . . 476
28.10.1 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
28.10.2 Input/Output –Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
28.10.3 Input/Output–Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
29.AI HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/MODELER

CONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
30.HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

30.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
30.2 ACCELERATION AND SERVO DELAY COMPENSATION (TYPE A/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
30.3 COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
30.4 ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
30.5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
30.6 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
30.7 INPUT SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
c–9
31.HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND

DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
31.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
31.2 CANNED CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
31.2.1 Differences from Conventional G73 and G81 through G83 Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
31.2.2 Retreat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
31.2.3 Positioning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
31.2.4 Single–Block Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
31.2.5 Return to Initial Point/Point R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
31.2.6 Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
31.2.7 Rapid Traverse Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
31.3 ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
31.4 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
31.5 EXAMPLE OF CYCLE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
32.TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

32.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
32.2 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
32.3 ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
32.4 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
33.MACRO CALL USING G CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
34.SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

34.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
34.2 SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
34.3 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
34.4 NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
35.TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

35.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
35.2 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
35.3 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
35.4 EXTERNAL INTERFACE SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
35.5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
35.6 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
35.7 SPINDLE ROTATION DISABLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
35.8 AUTOMATIC TURN–OFF OPERATION OF THE TOUCH PROBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
36.MANUAL GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

36.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
36.2 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
36.3 OPERATION OF THE MANUAL GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
36.3.1 Explanation of Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
36.3.2 Switching Over to Manual Guide Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
36.3.3 Data Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
36.3.4 Selection of NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
c–10
36.3.5 Creation of NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

36.3.6 Program Check (Graphic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
36.3.7 Convert to NC Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
36.3.8 Editing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
36.3.9 Copy and Deleting of NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
36.3.10 Auto and MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
36.3.11 Back Ground Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
36.3.12 Measurement Cycle Function (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
36.3.12.1Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
36.3.12.2Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
36.3.12.3Measurement Cycle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
36.3.12.4Drawing Function and NC Statement Conversion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
36.3.12.5Output of Measurement Results to Custom Macro Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
V. MAINTENANCE
1. DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
1.1 DAILY CHECK–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
1.1.1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
1.1.2 Replenishing the Tank with Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
1.1.3 Inspecting Cutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
1.1.4 Inspecting Each Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
1.2 WORK AT CLOSING TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
1.2.1 Removing Cut Scraps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
1.2.2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
1.2.3 Inspecting Each Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
1.2.4 Spindle Run–in (for 15000min–1 Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

2.1 LUBRICATING EACH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
2.1.1 Greasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
2.1.2 Concentrated lubrication with Intermittent Oiling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
2.1.3 Greasing and Oiling Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
2.2 SPECIFIED BRANDS OF LUBRICANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
2.2.1 Recommended Lubricants (Grease and Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
2.3 MAINTENANCE OF AC SPINDLE MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
2.3.1 Periodical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
2.4 REPLACING EXPENDABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
2.4.1 Battery Replacement Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
2.4.2 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
2.4.3 Fluorescent Lamp in the Inside Light Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
4. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
5. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . 630

5.1 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
5.2 RESETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
5.3 CHECKING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
c–11
5.4 REGISTERING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
6. RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
APPENDIXES
A. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

B.1 SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
B.2 DIMENSIONS OF THE TABLE SURFACE AND T GROOVE (NOMINAL WIDTH: 14) . . . . . . 650
B.3 DIMENSIONS OF THE INSIDE OF THE SPLASH GUARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
B.4 DIMENSIONS OF THE SYSTEM AROUND THE COOLANT OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
B.5 DIMENSIONS OF THE END OF THE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
B.6 MIST COLLECTOR MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
C. G CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
D. OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
E. STATUS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
F. ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

F.1 ERROR CODE DISPLAYED ON LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
F.2 SPINDLE AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
F.2.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
F.2.2 List of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
F.3 POWER SUPPLY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
F.4 SERVO AMPLIFIER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
F.5 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744

G.1 OPERATOR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
G.2 DIAGNOS MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
H. PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
I. RECOMMENDED ATA CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

J.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET AND PCMCIA ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
J.2 LIST OF FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
J.2.1 FACTOLINK Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
J.2.2 FOCAS1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
J.2.3 DNC1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
J.2.4 FTP File Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
c–12
J.2.5 Functional Differences between the Embedded Ethernet Function and the Ethernet Function
Based on the Option Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
J.3 SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
J.3.1 Parameter Setting of the FACTOLINK Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
J.3.1.1 Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
J.3.1.2 FACTOLINK parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
J.3.1.3 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
J.3.1.4 Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
J.3.1.5 Configuring a large network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
J.3.2 Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
J.3.2.1 Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
J.3.2.2 FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
J.3.2.3 Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
J.3.2.4 Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
J.3.3 Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
J.3.3.1 Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
J.3.3.2 FTP file transfer parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
J.3.3.3 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
J.3.3.4 Using the FTP file transfer function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
J.3.4 Communication Parameter Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
J.4 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
J.5 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
J.5.1 FACTOLINK Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
J.5.2 FTP File Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
J.5.2.1 Host file list display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
J.5.2.2 Host file search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
J.5.2.3 Host file deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
J.5.2.4 NC program input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
J.5.2.5 NC program output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
J.5.2.6 Input/output of various types of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
J.5.2.7 Checking and changing of the connection host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
J.6 EMBEDDED ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
J.7 EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
J.8 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
J.8.1 Check Items Related to Connection with the HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
J.8.2 Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
J.8.3 Checking the Setting of Each Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
J.8.4 Checking Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
J.9 ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
J.9.1 EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
J.9.2 EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
J.9.3 EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
J.9.4 EMB_ETH FACTOLINK LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
J.10 GLOSSARY FOR ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
c–13
I. OUTLINE
B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 1. OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
α–T14/21iCe series are vertical CNC drills capable of performing

efficient simple milling in addition to drilling and rigid tapping.
3
1. OUTLINE OUTLINE B–85014EN/01
1.1 (1) Linear machining and arc machining

High precision linear and arc milling at various angles can be done.
FEATURES Drilling and tapping can also be done.
(2) High speed turret
The turret permits short–cut random selection to enable high–speed
tool changes. It is not necessary to consider tool interference because
the spindle goes down independently.
(3) Rigid tapping
For rigid tapping in which the spindle and the Z axis are
synchronously fed, a tap with a floating mechanism is not required.
This enables precision tapping in a short time.
(4) Abundant NC functions
A variety of NC functions supporting various types of machining
ranging from parts machining such as drilling and tapping to milling
and model machining are provided.
(5) Absolute–position detecting system
The absolute–position detecting system is one of the standard
features. Return to the reference position is not required after
switching the power on (annual battery replacement is necessary).
(6) Highly reliable
The problems that conventionally occurred with pneumatic or
hydraulic technology have been solved using electronic technology.
As a result, reliability has been sufficiently enhanced and easy
maintenance is assured.
(7) Optimum spindle speed selection
The spindle speed of the spindle motor can be changed over a wide
range: 80 min–1 to 8,000 min–1 (150min–1 to 15000min–1 as option).
The spindle speed is programmable at every 1 min–1 and therefore the
optimum spindle speed can be set.
(8) High performance AC servo motor
As the servo motors for the X–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis, AC servo
motors are used. So, no maintenance including brush replacement is
required.
The rapid traverse rate along each axis is 48 m/min (X–axis, Y–axis,
Z–axis), so that waste time can be minimized when cutting is not
performed.
(9) Quick operation function
A quick operation function beyond the operability of the
conventional CNC machine tools is provided as standard. This
function enables the operator to operate the machine as desired with
the graphical screen and guidance.
(10)Safety functions
The safety–related functions of this machine comply with category
3 in accordance with the EN954–1 European Safety Standard.
This machine was manufactured in accordance with Appendix 1 of
the 98/37/EC Machine Directive.
4
1.2 The FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series machines are vertical

drilling machines that perform cutting (such as drilling, tapping, and
USE OF THE milling) under control of a CNC (computerized numerical controller).
MACHINE
Do not use the FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series machines for
any purpose other than stated above.
The cutting power of the ROBODRILL varies with the workpiece type,
cutter, coolant, and other factors. For details, refer to the applicable cutter
or coolant operator’s manuals.
The following table lists examples of machining with the ROBODRILL.

Workpiece S45C FC200 ADC12
Drill diameter (mm) 20 φ25 φ30
Material HSS HSS HSS
Spindle speed S (min–1) 398 382 637
Feedrate F (mm/min) 80 115 255
Coolant No. 5 of No. 2 of JIS type 1
JIS type 2 (diluted to 1:9)
Load meter (%) 135 140 140
Workpiece S45C FC200 ADC12

Tapping screw M16 M20 M24
designation Pitch 2 2.5 3
Spindle speed S(min–1) 298 264 219
Feedrate F (mm/min) 596 660 657
Coolant No. 5 of No. 2 of JISW type 1
JIS type 2 (diluted to 1:9)
Precision Qualified for JIS class 2
These values depend on the types and rigidity of tooling, cutters, jigs, and
workpieces, the property and supply state of coolant, and so forth.
The following table lists the specifications of the machines.

(α–T14iCe series)
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
α–T14iCSe α–T14iCe α–T14iCLe
Travel X- axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) 300mm 500mm 700mm
Y- axis (Cross movement of saddle) 300 + 10mm 400mm
Z- axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) 330mm
Distance from table surface to spindle edge sur- 150 to 480mm
face
Distance from the front surface of the column to 400mm
the center line of the spindle
Table Area 630 × 330mm 650mm × 400mm 850mm × 410mm
Load capacity 150kg (unifom load) 200kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load)
Type 3–14–mm slots with a space of 125mm
Spindle Spindle speed range 80 to 8000min- 1
Type of spindle taper hole 7/24 taper No. 30
Feedrate Rapid traverse feedrate (X, Y, Z) 48,000mm/min
cutting feedrate 1 to 15000mm/min
5
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Turret Tool change system Turret type
(spindle independent from turret)
Type of tool shank MAS BT30
Type of retension knob MAS P30T- 1 (45° )
Tool storage capacity 14
Maximum tool diameter Distance from taper gage line /max. diameter:
0 to 28mm /50mm
34 to 120mm /80mm
120 to 250mm /40mm]
(80mm : in case 3kg tool mass)
Maximum tool length 200mm 250mm (It’s depended on spec.)
Method of tool selection Random shortest path
Maximum tool mass Max. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 15kg)
or
Max. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 22kg)
Tool changing time (tool to tool) Approx. 0.9 sec. or Approx. 1.4 sec.
Motor Spindle drive motor FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR
5. 5 kW (10 min rating)/
3. 7 kW (continuous rating)
Feed motors FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL αM8i
X, Y, Z : αM8i (2.0 kw)
Power sources Electrical power supply 200V AC + 10% to –15%, 3–phase, 50/60Hz "1Hz
or 220V AC +10% to –15%, 3–phase,
60Hz 1Hz, "10kVA
Compressed air supply 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure)
0.15m3/min (150ȏ/min) (at atmospheric pressure)
Machine size Machine height 2236 ± 10mm
Floor space 995mm × 2207mm 1565mm × 2027mm 2115mm × 2027mm
Mass of machine with the control section Approx. 1650kg Approx. 2000kg Approx. 2100kg
Accuracy Positioning accuracy 0.010mm/300mm
(measured in
compliance with Repeatability ±0.002mm
JIS B 6201)
(α–T21iCe series)
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Travel X- axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) 300mm 500mm 700mm
Y- axis (Cross movement of saddle) 300 + 10mm 400mm
Z- axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) 330mm
Distance from table surface to spindle edge sur- 150 to 480mm
face
Distance from the front surface of the column to 400mm
the center line of the spindle
Table Area 630 × 330mm 650mm × 400mm 850mm × 410mm
Load capacity 150kg (unifom load) 200kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load)
Type 3–14–mm slots with a space of 125mm
Spindle Spindle speed range 80 to 8000min- 1
Type of spindle taper hole 7/24 taper No. 30
Feedrate Rapid traverse feedrate (X, Y, Z) 48,000mm/min
cutting feedrate 1 to 15000mm/min
6
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Turret Tool change system Turret type
(spindle independent from turret)
Type of tool shank MAS BT30
Type of retension knob MAS P30T- 1 (45° )
Tool storage capacity 21
Maximum tool diameter Distance from taper gage line /max. diameter:
0 to 28mm /50mm
34 to 120mm /80mm
120 to 250mm /40mm]
(80mm : in case 3kg tool mass)
Maximum tool length 190mm 250mm*1
Method of tool selection Random shortest path
Maximum tool mass Max. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 23kg)
or
Max. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 23kg)
Tool changing time (cut to cut) Approx. 1.8 sec. or Approx. 2.4 sec.
Motor Spindle drive motor FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR
5. 5 kW (10 min rating)/
3. 7 kW (continuous rating)
Feed motors FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL αM8i
X, Y, Z : αM8i (2.0 kw)
Power sources Electrical power supply 200V AC + 10% to –15%, 3–phase, 50/60Hz "1Hz
or 220V AC +10% to –15%, 3–phase,
60Hz 1Hz, "10kVA
Compressed air supply 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure)
0.15m3/min (150ȏ/min) (at atmospheric pressure)
Machine size Machine height 2236 ± 10mm
Floor space 995mm × 2207mm 1565mm × 2027mm 2115mm × 2027mm
Mass of machine with the control section Approx. 1650kg Approx. 2000kg Approx. 2100kg
Accuracy Positioning accuracy 0.010mm/300mm
(measured in
compliance with Repeatability ±0.002mm
JIS B 6201)
*1 It’s depended on spec.
Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature
Operating: 0_C to 45_C
Storage or transportation: 20_C to 60_C
Temperature drift
1.1_C/min or lower
Humidity
Usual: 75% or lower (relative humidity)
Short–period: 95% or lower
Vibration
5 m/s2 (0.5G) or lower
Atmosphere
No corrosive gas
No flammable gas
7
1.3 The equivalent continuous A–weighted average sound level measured on

the shop floor where the machine is installed is 70 dB or lower.
SOUND PRESSURE
The following table lists the measurement conditions.
LEVEL
The following table lists the measurement conditions.
Item Condition
Program O400
Tool See the table below.
Workpiece material S45C (15(l) 9.5(w) 3(d)cm)
Cutting depth 1mm
Coolant See the table below.
Cycle time 57s
Measurement time 57s
Measurement conditions
Item Manufacturer Model
Tool SANDVIK RA265.2–80 (with six teeth)
Tip SANDVIK SM30
Coolant Yushiro Yushiroken EZ20
D Program used
O400
G91G28Z0;
G00G40G49G80G90;
G54G28X0Y0Z0;
M06T01;
M03S800;
G00X0Y0;
G00G90G43Z1.H01;
M08;
G01G90Z–1.F600;
X250.;
Y–40.;
X0;
M05;
G91M09;
G28Z0G49;
M02;
8
B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 2. PART NAMES
2 PART NAMES
9
2. PART NAMES OUTLINE B–85014EN/01
2.1
MACHINE
Fig.2.1 (a) Inner view of Machine
10
Fig.2.1 (b) Outer view of Machine
(1) Spindle motor (13) Grip

(2) X axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) (14) Tool
(3) Y axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) (15) Turret gear
(4) Z axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) (16) Spindle (MS) gear
(5) Column (17) X axis telescopic cover
(6) Bed (18) Y axis telescopic cover (front side)
(7) Table (19) Y axis slide cover
(8) Saddle (20) Z axis take–up cover
(9) Leveling block (21) Splash guard
(10) Spindle head (22) Controller operator’s panel
(11) Turret support (23) Controller rack
(12) Turret
11
2. PART NAMES OUTLINE B–85014EN/01
2.2
CONTROLLER RACK
1 2 3
4
5
6 7
Fig.2.2 Inside of Controller rack
(1) Power supply (5) Backup battery for pulse coder

(2) Spindle amplifier (6) Circuit breaker
(3) Servo amplifier (7) Power panel
(4) Connector panel
12
2.3
VIEW AND
COMPONENTS OF
THE OPERATOR’S
PANEL
(3) Memory
card slot
(1) LCD
(2) Soft keys
(4) Power
switches
(5) Operation
keys
(8) Override
(6) Manual pulse

generator
(7) Input
protection key
(9) Cycle start (11)RS–232C

feed hold interface
(10)Emergency
stop button
13
3. OPERATOR’S PANEL OUTLINE B–85014EN/01
3 OPERATOR’S PANEL
ÃÃ
ÃÃ 20
ÃÃ
ÃÃ 1
ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
2
Ã ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃ
10 11 12 2
Ã ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
3 8
ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
4 5 6
9
Ã ÃÃ
Ã ÃÃ
13
7
Ã ÃÃ
Ã ÃÃ
18
16
ÃÃ
Ã ÃÃ 19
Ã ÃÃ
15
ÃÃ
17
Fig.3 (a) Standard type operator’s panel
14
B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 3. OPERATOR’S PANEL
Fig.3 (b) Full keyboard type operator’s panel
15
No. Name Function

1 Power switches These switches turn the control power on and off.
(When an alarm is issued, you cannot sometimes turn off the power.)
2 Operation mode [MANUAL (HANDLE) key]
selection keys Selects the mode that allows the manual pulse generator to be used to cause
movement along each axis.
[AUTO (MEMORY) key]
Selects automatic operation (memory) mode. With the standard operator’s
panel, this key is also used to select remote operation mode.
[MENU (MDI) key]
Selects MDI operation mode. When this key is pressed while QUICK screen
is being displayed, MENU OPERATION screen appears.
[EDIT key]
Selects program editing (EDIT) mode.
[(REF.POINT) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
Selects reference position return mode.
[(JOG) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
Selects jog mode.
[(REMOTE) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
Selects remote operation mode.
3 Spindle operation [Spindle operation key]
key Turns and stops the spindle.
Spindle speed [Spindle speed override keys]
override keys These keys change the spindle speed specified with the S function by 30 to
200%.
Decrease : The spindle speed is decreased.
100% : The spindle speed specified with the S function is restored.
Increase : The spindle speed is increased.
(When the front door lock is released, the spindle override is invalid.)
4 Tool change When this key is pressed when the LED of the MENU (MDI) key is on, a tool
change to the adjacent tool on the right on the turret takes place.
5 Coolant Turns coolant or cuttings air blow on and off.
6 DOOR Releases the lock of the front door.
After the lock is released, you can open the door.
7 Axis selection keys [Axis selection keys]
In manual mode (reference position return, jog, or handle mode), these keys
are used to select the target axis for movement and the movement direction.
In reference position return and jog modes ³ Movement is made only when
the key is being pressed.
In handle mode ³ A target axis for movement is selected.
Handle magnifica- [Handle magnification selection keys]
tion selection keys In handle mode, these keys are used to select the amount of travel per handle
feed unit.
8 Operation selection [SINGLE BLOCK key]
keys Selects the function of executing one block in automatic operation then stop-
ping automatic operation.
[DRY RUN key]
Selects the function that sets the rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate to the
jog feed rate in automatic operation, ignoring the programmed F feedrate.
[M01 STOP key]
Selects the function that stops operation after executing a block containing
M01 in a program.
[“/” SKIP key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
Selects the function that suppresses the execution of blocks containing “/” in a
program.
[AUTO P.OFF key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
Selects the function that turns off the power automatically when a program
terminates or when an alarm is issued.
16
B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 3. OPERATOR’S PANEL
No. Name Function

9 Rapid traverse These keys are used to select the rapid traverse rate.
override keys (The 50% key is provided only for the full keyboard type.)
10 Alarm/status key Displays information about alarms, operator messages, diagnosis, and so
forth in a window.
11 QUICK/NC Key Switches the LCD display between QUICK screen and CNC screen.
12 Alphabet key Turns on and off the alphabetical character input function using soft keys.
(ABC@@@Z) When this key is set to ON, alphabetical characters are indicated in soft keys
to allow you to enter alphabetical characters.
(For the standard type operator’s panel only)
13 MDI keys [Page keys]
Used to change pages and screens.
[Cursor keys]
Used to move the cursor.
[Numeric keypad]
Used to enter numeric values.
[Alphabet keys] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
Used to enter alphabetical characters.
[Reset key]
Used to, for example, release an alarm.
[Input key]
Used to enter data.
[Cancel key]
Cancels characters or numbers being entered.
[Alter key]
Replaces the portion indicated by the cursor with a new command during pro-
gram editing on CNC screen.
[Insert key]
Inserts a new command after the command indicated by the cursor during
program editing on CNC screen.
[Delete key]
Deletes the command indicated by the cursor during program editing on CNC
screen.
[Help key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
Used to display the help screen of CNC screen. (You cannot use this key
when QUICK screen is being displayed.)
[Shift key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
Used to enter a character indicated in the lower right part of each address and
numeric key.
[Screen change keys] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
Used to switch between screens within QUICK screen.
<POS>
Changes the screen display to a position indication screen.
ABS, REL, ALL, MONITOR, etc.
<PROG>
Changes the screen display to a program indication screen.
PROG, [MDI], FROPY, etc.
<OFFSET/SETTING>
Changes the screen display to an offset indication or setting screen.
OFFSET, SETING, WORK, etc.
<SYSTEM>
Changes the screen display to a parameter or diagnosis screen.
PARAMETER, STATUS, [PMC], etc.
<MESSAGE>
Changes the screen display to an alarm or operator message screen.
Alarm, Diagnose, History, etc.
<GRAPHIC>
Changes the screen display to a graphics display.
14 Manual pulse gen- Used to operate each axis (X, Y, Z) of the machine manually (in handle mode).
erator
17
No. Name Function

15 Cycle start/ Automatic operation starts when you press the start button. During operation,
feed hold the start button is turned on in green. When you press the stop button, the
machine is placed in temporary halt state (feed hold state). In this state, the
temporary stop button is turned on in red.
16 Override [Feedrate override dial]
The feedrate specified with the F function for an axis is changed by 0 to 200%.
For the standard type operator’s panel, the feedrate in dry run operation can
also be changed with this dial.
[Jog override dial] (provided for the full keyboard type only)
The feedrate in jog mode and dry run operation is changed.
17 Emergency stop Used to stop machine movement in a moment in case of emergency.
button
18 Input protection When this key is set to ON, editing and input of programs and data are dis-
key abled.
19 RS–232–C Used to connect an external I/O device such as the Handy File.
interface
20 Memory card slot A memory card such as an ATA card is inserted into this slot.
18
B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 4. BASIC OPERATIONS
4 BASIC OPERATIONS
19
4. BASIC OPERATIONS OUTLINE B–85014EN/01
4.1 The screens for the ROBODRILL are grouped into the following two types.
SCREEN SWITCHING CNC screen This is a typical FANUC Series 18i–MB screen.
[Characteristics of the display]

D The title bar is yellow.
D The characters displayed on the right half of
the title bar are large.
Fig.4.1 (a) CNC screen
QUICK screen This is specially developed for the ROBODRILL.
[Characteristics of the display]

D The title bar is blue.
D The current time is displayed on the right half
of the title bar.
Fig.4.1 (b) QUICK screen
4.1.1 The QUICK screen and CNC screen are alternately displayed each time
the QUICK/NC button is pressed.
Switching between the
QUICK Screen and
CNC Screen
4.1.2 The CNC screen is classified as one of the following:

CNC Screen Switching <POS> : Displays the current position.
<PROG> : Enables you to edit and view programs.
<OFFSET/SETTING>: Enables you to specify offset and workpiece
coordinate data.
<SYSTEM> : Enables you to set parameters.
<MESSAGE> : Displays alarms and operator messages.
<GRAPHIC> : Draws tool paths and animated graphics patterns.
These screen groups can be selected as stated below:
20
(Operator’s panel of standard type)

To select one of the following screen groups, press the numeral key
labeled the corresponding screen group name, then press a page key.
(POS group)
(PROG group)
(OFFSET/SETTING group)
+ or ³ Switched to the respective screen group

(SYSTEM group)
(MESSAGE group)
(GRAPHIC group)
(Operator’s panel with a full keyboard)

Press one of the following keys.
21
4. BASIC OPERATIONS OUTLINE B–85014EN/01
4.2 On the standard–type operator’s panel, soft keys are used to enter
alphabetic characters.
ENTERING
ALPHABETIC Press the key on the operator’s panel.
CHARACTERS
Soft keys labeled alphabetic characters appear, enabling alphabetic
characters to be entered.
Pressing the key again cancels the alphabetic character entry
mode.
D On the QUICK screen, alphabetic character entry is available

only to the functions that require entering alphabetic
characters.
D No alphabetic character entry is available on the GRAPHIC
screen (such as the PATH GRAPHIC/SOLID GRAPHIC).
4.2.1 The letter keys are arranged in either the HALF pattern for program entry
or the FULL pattern for comment entry.
Arrangement of the
Letter Keys HALF pattern arrangement (switched using a soft key at either end).
O G F M S T X Y Z ;
H I J K P Q R ALTER DELETE :
N / B C D FULL ALTER DELETE ;
This key switches the mode between FULL and HALF.
22
FULL pattern arrangement (switched using a soft key at either end).
A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z SPACE ALTER DELETE ;
+ – * / = ? # & @ ;
( ) [ ] , HALF ALTER DELETE ;
This key switches the mode between FULL and HALF.
23
5. TOOLS OUTLINE B–85014EN/01
5 TOOLS
The standard tools of the former Japan Machine Tool Builder’s

Association (MAS403–1982 BT30 P30T–1) can be used. When you
purchase tools, confirm the shape and dimensions by referring to the
figure of the taper shank (MAS403–1982 BT30) and the pull stud
(MAS403–1982 P30T–1) of the Japan Machine Tool Builder’s
Association standard shown below.
Fig.5 (a) Taper Shank
Fig.5 (b) Pull Stud
The standard tools of the German industrial standard (DIN 69871–A30)

can be used with the machine conforming to the DIN GRIP standard. Use
the pull stud manufactured by FANUC (A290–6056–X801).
24
B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 5. TOOLS
The shapes and the dimensions of the taper shank (DIN 69871–A30) and
the pull stud (A290–6056–X801) of the German industrial standard are
shown in the figures below.
Details of the X portion
Fig.5 (c) Taper Shank
Fig.5 (d) Pull Stud
25
Center–through specification
The shape and dimensions of pull studs that comply with the
center–through specification are shown below.
O RING
Fig.5 (e) Pull Stud (MAS)
O RING
Fig.5 (f) Pull Stud (DIN)
26
Double–plane bound center through spindle (NC5) specification

The figures and dimensions of a taper shank and pull stud based on the
double–plane bound center through spindle (NC5) specification are
shown below.
Fig.5 (g) Taper shank
NOTE
1 The distance (0.1 to 0.15) between the φ30.4 reference
diameter and φ46 end face is an adjustment value
dedicated to the ROBODRILL.
Fig.5 (h) Pull stud (without center through)
27
Fig.5 (i) Pull stud (with center through)
In the α–T14/21iCe series, the maximum tool diameter, length, and

weight are limited as listed below. Before operating the machine, check
the dimensions and weight of the tool.
(1) Maximum tool diameter
Length (mm) from the taper gauge surface Maximum diameter (mm)
34 or less ø65
From 34 (exclusive) to 120 (inclusive) ø80
From 120 (exclusive) to 250 (inclusive) ø40
(2) Maximum tool length

α–T14iCe/CLe
MACHINE SPLASH without Auto with Auto
GUARD door door
STANDARD 1 door 250mm 250mm
2 doors 250mm 250mm
HIGH COLUMN 100 mm 1 door 235mm 235mm
2 doors 215mm 215mm
2 doors 215mm 215mm
2 doors 250mm 215mm
28
α–T14iCSe
200mm
α–T21iCe/CLe
Product MACHINE Maximum tool length
α–T21iCe/CLe SPG 1 door 250mm
SPG 2 doors 215mm
α–T21iCse HIGH COLUMN 0,100mm 190mm
HIGH COLUMN 200mm 90mm
(3) Maximum tool mass: 2 kg (total mass: 15 kg)/3 kg (total mass:

22 kg) When mounting a tool of 2 kg or
more (up to 3 kg), set the tool mass to 3 kg.
(From a viewpoint of safety, 3 kg is
factory–set.)
Keep relay K0.4 = 0 3 kg setting

K0.4 = 1 2 kg setting.
250 (Depend on specifications see Tables) (α–T14iCe/CLe,

α–T21iCe/CLe)
200 (α–T14iCSe)
190 (Depend on specifications see Tables) (α–T21iCSe)
Fig.5 (j) Tool Limits
Be careful not to use tools that do not satisfy the dimensional restrictions
above. Otherwise, the troubles listed below can occur.
(1) A tool longer than the maximum tool length can interfere with the
splash guard in turret turning.
(2) When the maximum tool diameter is exceeded:
* Rigid tapping may not be able to be performed normally.
(3) When the maximum tool weight is exceeded:
* Trouble can occur when the tool is changed.
* If an excessively heavy tool is used, the temperature of the spindle
bearing rises abnormally, reducing the life of the spindle bearing.
(Setting the tool mass)
(1) Specify the following PMC parameters:
K00#4 = 0: Changes the tool mass to 3 kg.
29
K00#4 = 1: Changes the tool mass to 2 kg.
NOTE
Bit 4 of parameter K00 is set to 0 (tool mass of 3 kg) before
shipment from the factory.
(2) Turn the power OFF.

(3) Turn the power ON. The following message appears on the screen.
“PARAMETER FOR TOOL MASS 3kg IS SET. ARE YOU
SURE?” or “PARAMETER FOR TOOL MASS 2kg IS SET. ARE
YOU SURE?”
(4) Click soft key [EXEC] or [CANCEL].
To automatically change the NC parameters related to the tool mass,
click [EXEC].
To return bit 4 of parameter K00 to the previous value and cancel the
changing of the NC parameters related to the tool mass, click
[CANCEL].
(5) If [EXEC] is clicked in the above step, turn the power OFF and then
ON again according to the guidance.
30
B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 6. JIGS
6 JIGS
Three T–shaped grooves with the nominal size of 14 mm are provided at

intervals of 125 mm on the top surface of the table. (See Appendix B,
“DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE”.)
NOTE
A maximum load of 200 kg (Max 150kg for α–T14iCSe and
α–T21iCSe), including jigs and workpieces, can be put on
the table. Avoid putting more on the table than the
maximum load.
31
7. COOLANT OUTLINE B–85014EN/01
7 COOLANT
The capacity of the coolant tank of the ROBODRILL α–T14/21iC series

are approximately 100 or 200 litres. When water–soluble coolant is
thinned with water, take every precaution so water does not drop on the
machine or the NC unit.
FANUC recommends the following coolants (cutting fluids).
Type Manufacturer Brand
Nisseki Mitsubishi UNICUT TG20
IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. DAPHNE CUT
Oily AS–25F
SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. SPEED SC22A
Mobil Oil Corp. Bakumaru 15J
Nisseki Mitsubishi UNISOLUBLE HD–M
UNISOLUBLE HD
IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. DAPHNE MILCOOL
SD
Water–soluble
SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. DROMUS OIL EPL
MOBIL OIL CORPORATION MOBIL MET 150
MOBIL MET 150
Yusiro Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Yusiroken EZ20
NOTE
On the ROBODRILL, nitrile–butadiene rubber (NBR) and
fluorination rubber are used as sealant and protective
materials. Do not use so strong coolant that will cause paint
to peel off.
32
II. INSTALLATION
B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION
CAUTIONS
The machine shall be moved or installed by the maintenance personnel.
Moving or installing the ROBODRILL requires understanding it in details.

No person other than the maintenance personnel of the ROBODRILL
shall move or install it.
The term “maintenance personnel” refers to those people who have
working knowledge about machinery and electricity for maintenance and
have finished the maintenance course of the FA school or
ROBOMACHINE school or who have equivalent knowledge and have
been certified by the company they work for.
Fork lift or crane operators in charge of moving the ROBODRILL shall
have the relevant license.
To lift the machine, use a crane with an allowable load of at least 3 tons.
Do not use a crane, hook, or rope whose allowable load is below 3 tons
to lift the machine.
If the machine gets out of balance when lifted, put it down on the floor,
and adjust the length of the hook and rope, then lift it again.
Place the machine on a flat, stable floor.
The floor on which the machine is installed must satisfy the following
conditions:
1. Placing a load of 2.5 tons on the floor does not deform it or
develop any other trouble.
2. The floor is completely flat, with no protuberance or hollow.
3. The floor surface is hard enough to withstand a pressure of 1.5
MPa (15 kgf/cm2), without being deformed.
4. The floor surface is smooth.
5. The floor will not deteriorate with time.
6. The floor will not deteriorate in regular use.
If the floor does not meet any of the above conditions, it can develop a failure,
making it impossible to make the most of the machine performance.
Allow a service clearance in an area where the machine is installed.
Illuminate in the shop floor with a sufficient brightness.
Working in a dark place can invite an incorrect operation, leading to an

accident.
The shop floor on which the machine is installed must be illuminated with
at least 300 luxes.
It is recommended that an optional intra–machine lamp be installed.
35
INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01
Pay attention to how the mechanism is saved and packed.
When transporting the machine or leaving it unused for a long time,

observe the following:
1. Fix the spindle head and table with packing materials.
2. Apply a rust inhibitor to the specified portions of the machine.
3. Fix the turret mechanism with nylon ties.
Firmly secure the spindle head and table with the

packing materials before removing the Z–axis motor.
The Z–axis motor incorporates a brake. If the Z–axis motor is removed

without the spindle head and table first being secured with the packing
materials. therefore, the Z–axis will fall out.
36
1. CHECKING INSTALLATION
B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1 CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
(1) Power supply voltage, frequency (Hz), and power capacity (kVA)
Check the following nameplate on the upper side of the NC rack:
JAPAN and export standard

If the value of the power supply voltage indicated on “POWER
SUPPLY V V” in the nameplate is in the range of +10% to –15%, the
power supply voltage is valid. (220V is valid for only 60Hz)
(3 PHASE = three phases)
If the frequency is 50 "1 or 60 "1 Hz, it is valid.
(2) Ambient temperature
In operation : 0 _C to 45 _C
In storage or transportation : –20 _C to 60 _C
(3) Temperature change
Within 1.1 _C/min.
(4) Humidity
Normal : 75% or less (relative humidity)
Temporary : 95% or less
(5) Compressed air supply
0.49 MPa, 150 Nȏ/min
37
2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01
2 TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE
38
B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE
2.1 Prepare for transporting the machine according to the following steps:
PREPARATION (1) Remove the Y–axis telescopic cover (at the front).
BEFORE (2) Remove the coolant nozzle base at the bottom of the spindle head.
TRANSPORTATION (3) Move the table to the position indicated by the machine coordinates
X=250(T14/21iCe)/350(T14/21iCLe)/150(T14/21iCSe),
Y=–300(T14(21)iCe, iCLe)/–277(T14(21)iCSe).
(4) Firmly secure the packing plate using the M12 tapped hole on the top
rear of the table. Be careful not to damage the top of the table.
Fig.2.1 (a) Securing the Packing Plate (at the Table)
(5) Slowly lower the spindle head to the position where Z=–282. Be
careful not to hit the spindle head against the packing plate.
(6) Check whether the position of the hole on the packing plate is aligned
with that of the tapped hole for installing the coolant nozzle base at
the bottom of the spindle head. If not, move the table slightly to make
the adjustment.
(7) After the hole position is aligned correctly, lower the spindle head
until it touches the packing plate.
(8) Turn off the power.
(9) Fix the spindle head to the packing plate with an M12 30 bolt,
spring washer, and plain washer.
Fig.2.1 (b) Securing the Packing Plate (at Spindle Head)
39
2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01
(10)Secure the turret with the nylon band or equivalent.
Turret supprt
Turret
Spring
Nylon band
Bolt
Turretcam
Cam groove
Fig.2.1 (c) Securing the Turret
(11)Install two M30 eyebolts in the upper front of the bed and on top of
the column.
M30 eyebolt
M30 eyebolts
Fig.2.1 (d) Transportation status
NOTE
Be sure to make the above preparations before
transporting or lifting the machine.
40
B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE
2.2
TRANSPORTATION
Fig.2.2 Lift the machine
Three eyebolts and a rope or cable are used to lift the machine.
NOTE
1 Use a rope or cable whose permissible load is 3000 kg or
more.
2 Be very careful not to impact the machine when lifting it.
That is, lift the machine slowly.
3 If the rope can directly touch the machine, insert cloth or
wood between the rope and the machine to prevent the
machine from being damaged.
41
3. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01
3 INSTALLATION
42
B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3. INSTALLATION
3.1 Position the attached leveling blocks under the four leveling bolts and
slowly put the machine on the blocks. Set the nuts over the casting (bed).
INSTALLING
LEVELING BOLTS
AND BLOCKS
α–T14/21iCe
Leveling bolt
Nut
Leveling block
α–T14/21iCSe
α–T14/21iCLe
Fig.3.1 Mount the YC stand with the shown surface (surface with white resin) facing forward.
43
3.2 Remove the two M30 eyebolts on the top front of the bed.
REMOVING THE
EYEBOLTS FOR
LIFTING THE
MACHINE
44
3.3 Untie the nylon band that secures the turret.

REMOVING THE Remove the packing plate according to the following steps:
PACKING PLATE (1) Remove the bolts fixing the packing plate on the top of the table and
at the bottom of the spindle head.
(2) After turning on the power, slowly raise the spindle head and remove
the packing plate.
(See II–3.4 for connecting the power supply.)
(3) Remove three eye bolts.
45
3.4
CONNECTING THE
POWER SUPPLY
3.4.1 Connect the power cable to the power distribution board. Then, connect
Cabling and Phase the coolant to the terminals of the coolant motor (U.V.W.G.).
Matching Phase Matching
Connect an input terminal block phase rotation meter as shown in Fig.
3.4.1 (a), and connect the power supply so that the phase rotation meter
disk rotates clockwise.
To switchboard
Phase rotation meter
Circuit breaker
Fig.3.4.1 (a) Connecting of Phase Rotation Meter
46
Fuses
Fuses are located in the control unit cabinet as shown below. Confirm
these fuses are not blown out.
Fuses (F1 to F5)
Fuses (F6)
Fig.3.4.1 (b) Locations of Fuses (1/5)
Fuses (1A)
Fig.3.4.1 (c) Locations of Fuses (2/5)
47
Fuses (3.2A)
Fuses (2.0A)
Fuses (1.0A)
Fuses (1A)
Fuses (1A)
Fig.3.4.1 (d) Locations of Fuses (3/5)
48
Rear side of LCD
CP1
FUSE
Fuses (5A)
Fig.3.4.1 (e) Locations of Fuses (4/5)
Fuses (5A)
Fig.3.4.1 (f) Locations of Fuses (5/5)
49
3.4.2 Check the following items for each input power supply.
Setting of Input Power Current values of thermal relay
Supply Thermal Relay Set Value
Coolant MCC1 1.8A (NOTE)
Flood coolant MCC2 2.1A
NOTE
Adjust the setting to the midpoint of 1.4 A and 2.2 A. (MCC1)
Adjust the setting to the midpoint of 1.7 A and 2.6 A. (MCC2)
50
3.5 Compressed air is used for spindle air blow and for opening and closing
the automatic door in the ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series.
CONNECTING THE
Connect the compressed air supply satisfying the following specification
COMPRESSED AIR with the IN port (PT 1/4 inch) of the filter regulator at the rear of splash
SUPPLY guard.
Specification:
490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2 of gauge pressure)
0.5 m3/min (for a machine with an automatic door opening +0.02
m3/min are added, respectively.)
51
Regulator
Pressure adjustment valve

(to be pulled up and turned)
Top view
Air supply inlet
Primary filter/regulator
Pressure setting : 0.5MPa
(Pressure range mark : 0.4MPa to 0.6MPa)
Pressure switch Air sealing regulator Speed con-

Pressure setting : Pressure setting : 0.04MPa troller fully
0.3MPa (Pressure range mark : opened
0.03MPa to 0.05MPa)
Primary filter/regulator Rotary–union regulator

Pressure setting : 0.5MPa Pressure setting : 0.3MPa
(Pressure range mark : (Pressure range mark :
0.4MPa to 0.6MPa) 0.26MPa to 0.34MPa)
Pressure switch Air sealing regulator

Pressure setting : Speed control-
Pressure setting : 0.04MPa ler fully
0.3MPa (Pressure range mark : opened
0.03MPa to 0.05MPa)
52
3.6 The following parts are coated with corrosion–preventive grease for
preventing them from being corroded during transportation. Remove the
REMOVAL OF corrosion–preventive grease from these parts.
CORROSION D Rolling guides (LM guides) for X, Y, Z axis
PREVENTIVE D Internal face of spindle taper part
GREASE D Upper face of table
D Turret rear side and spindle nose gears
(After removing anticorrosive grease, apply lubricating grease.
Refer to V–2.1.1).
53
3.7 The ROBODRILL α-T14/21iCe may be shipped with its Z-axis motor
dismounted. In this case, the Z-axis motor must be mounted so that the
MOUNTING A Z–AXIS factory-set machine zero point is reestablished correctly when the
MOTOR AT MACHINE machine is installed. To achieve this, follow the procedure below.
INSTALLATION
(1) Turn off the power to the machine, or check that the power to the
machine is already off.
(2) Remove the cover from the Z–axis housing. (These items are
packaged separately when shipped.)
(3) Wipe off any rust inhibitor grease from the coupling.
(4) After making sure that the motor shaft is provided with a key, place
the servo motor on the housing with the motor shaft key aligned to
the key groove of the coupling.
Coupling Retaining screw

Tightening torque :
1.4KN (145kg.cm)
(5) As shown below, after making sure that the motor connector is on the
left–hand side of the machine as viewed from the front of the
machine, tighten the motor mounting bolts. If the motor and housing
mounting bolt holes are not in line, align them by rotating the motor
manually with a relatively strong force.
54
(6) Fasten the coupling retaining bolts on the motor shaft side to a
specified torque (1.4 kN or 145 kg.cm). If the bolts are in such a phase
that tightening is impossible, turn on the power and move the Z–axis
manually to put them in a phase that allows tightening, then tighten
them. (Do not perform automatic operation with the bolts for the
coupling loose.)
(7) Connect the three Z-axis motor cables.
(8) Mount the Z-axis housing cover, then tighten the screws.
(9) After turning on the power, make a reference position return.
Cover
NOTE
1 The motor grid position used as the reference for the zero
point varies from one servo motor to another. If a servo
motor is mounted in other than its original machine, the
machine zero point will shift, causing abnormal machine
operation. To avoid this, motors must be mounted only on
the machine with which they are supplied.
2 After motor installation, an alarm is issued to request origin
return when the power is turned on. For an explanation of
how to perform origin return, see Section V3.
55
3.8 After removing the devices for transportation, level the machine tool.
LEVEL ADJUSTING (1) Turn on the power and move the table to the middle of X and Y–axis
stroke.
(2) After loosening fixing nuts, adjust the leveling bolts to a suitable
length.
(3) Adjust for level by the four leveling bolts by turns to within 0.04
mm/m using the 150 mm JIS first class level.
Finally, secure the leveling bolts with the fixing nuts.
(4) Confirm that level is maintained, to within 0.04 mm/m at the stroke
end of the positive and negative sides of the Y axis.
Fig.3.8 Leveling
56
3.9 (1) Attach one arbor to the grip through the notch of the cover at the right
rear of the turret.
MOUNTING TOOLS
(2) Press the key on the MDI operator’s panel.
(3) Press the key, which is one of the rapid traverse selection
buttons on the machine operator’s panel.
(4) Press the key on the machine operator’s panel. Change cutting
tools once under no–load running.
Then, check whether tools were changed smoothly. If not, prepare to
press the EMERGENCY STOP key immediately.
(5) Attach one arbor to the grip through the notch.
(6) Press the key.
Check whether the arbor and the spindle head are firmly clamped
together.
NOTE
If the arbor is not correctly attached to the grip, a failure such
as tool dropping occurs.
If tools can be changed smoothly, any of the rapid traverse
selection buttons may be pressed on the machine
operator’s panel.
(7) After repeating the same procedure, check whether fourteen and
twentyone arbors are gripped in the turret.
(8) Turn off the power.
NOTE
1 The turret is finely adjusted. Do not carelessly grab or apply
load to the turret.
2 The weight of an arbor to be installed in the turret must be
2 kg max. The total weight of the fourteen arbors must not
exceed 15 kg and 23kg. When mounting a tool of 2 kg or
more (up to 3 kg), set the tool mass to 3 kg. The tool mass
is factory–set to 3 kg to assure operator safety.
3 Take into consideration the weight of each arbor when
installing the arbors so that the turret is not out of balance
in weight.
57
3.10 After installing the machine, install the coolant unit (and flood–coolant
unit) according to the following steps:
INSTALLING THE
COOLANT UNIT (1) Install the coolant tank at the back of the machine, or under the NC
rack. The coolant tank must, however, be installed so that the pump
is positioned at the right of the machine, when viewing the machine
from the front.
(2) Install the nozzle at the bottom of the spindle head.
(3) Connect the pump to the nozzle, and the pump to the pipe of the
flood–coolant unit.
(4) Connect the controller rack to the pump terminal with the coolant
cable.
NOTE
Insulate the terminals using vinyl caps.
Pump for coolant unit Pump for flood coolant unit
Fig.3.10 (a)
58
Fig.3.10 (b)
59
(5) Press the coolant button. Check that the pump rotates in the direction
shown by the arrow when viewing the pump from the window on the
top of the pump. Then stop the rotation of the pump.
Direction of rotation
Fig.3.10 (c) Pump and Surrounding Area
(6) Supply the coolant to the coolant tank.
60
3.11
Y–AXIS TELESCOPIC (1) Mount the YC stand with the shown surface (surface with white resin)
facing forward.
COVER (Y–COVER F)
(2) Mount a telescopic cover. Temporarily tighten the flange securing
bolts.
(3) Move the telescopic cover, along the Y–axis toward you, as much as
possible. Push in the free covers as far as possible, so that the
telescopic cover does not push the stopper vertically. Then, tighten
the flange securing bolts.
Cover fixed to the saddle
Saddle
Flange securing bolt
Free cover
Head
Fig.3.11
61
4. PACKING INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01
4 PACKING
When the machine is moved, transported, or lifted, the machine must be

packed to prevent the machine from being impacted.
Pack the machine according to the following steps:

(1) Sufficiently clean the top of the table and the inside of the splash
guard so that cuttings or other foreign matter do not remain in the
machine.
(2) Remove the tools from the turret.
(3) See II–2.1 when packing the machine.
62
III. ROUTINE OPERATIONS
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 1. OPERATING POSITIONS
1 OPERATING POSITIONS
The following figure shows the working places for the α–T14/21iCe
series.
Front door
Coolant unit
Operator’s panel
Left Right
Fixed cover Fixed cover
Table
Internal Light
65
1. OPERATING POSITIONS ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
The following table lists the operating positions and working places.
Viewed
No. Operation Operating position Working place
from
1 Workpiece change and jig setting Machine front section Operator’s panel and table top A
2 Program editing and data input/output Machine front section Operator’s panel A
3 Power on/off Machine front/rear Operator’s panel and controller cabinet A,B
section rear section
4 Tool change Machine front section Turret A
5 Chip cleaning Machine Inside the splash guard and coolant unit A,B
front/rear section
6 Coolant replenishment Machine rear section Coolant unit B
7 Fuse replacement Machine rear section Inside the controller cabinet B
8 Air pressure supplying and shutting off Machine rear section Air unit B
9 Greasing Machine front Inside the splash guard A,C,D
section/both sides
10 Lubricant replenishment for the Machine rear section Lubrication unit B
lubrication unit
11 Fluorescent lamp replacement Machine front section Intra–machine lamp A
12 Spindle motor cleaning Machine front section Spindle motor A
Before greasing, turn off the power, and remove the fixed side covers and
the protective cover.
Do not perform operation at a location other than the operation locations
described above. Working in the following places, for example, is likely
to be hazardous because of a bad working condition or unstable footing.
D Inside the machine
D On top of the controller cabinet
D On top of the column
D On top of the splash guard
D On top of the turret support
66
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF
2 SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF
67
2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
2.1 (1) Turn the handle of the circuit breaker on the control unit rack until it
clicks in the ON position. (Check that the door of the control unit rack
SWITCHING POWER is closed. If it is open, close it before turning the breaker handle to
ON the ON position.)
Fig.2.1 Turning the Breaker On
(2) Turn the power on by pressing the POWER ON button on the

operator’s panel.
(3) Several seconds after switching the power on, the “NOT READY”
display on the CRT screen disappears, and the machine is ready for
operation.
(4) Confirm that the fan motor for ventilation of the control unit rack
running.
NOTE
When the power is switched on, do not simultaneously
press any button (on the MDI panel or the machine
operator’s panel) other than the POWER ON button.
68
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF
2.2 (1) Confirm that the lamp of the CYCLE START button on the operator’s
panel is not lit.
SWITCHING POWER
OFF
Confirm this lamp is off.
(2) Confirm that no movable parts of the machine are moving.

(3) If any input/output device is connected, turn it off.
(4) Press the POWER OFF button.
(5) Turn the circuit–breaker handle on the door of the control unit rack
to the OFF position.
Fig.2.2 Turning the Breaker Off
NOTE
1 If the door of the control unit rack is not locked, the door
opens when the breaker handle is fully turned to the OFF
side. Normally, the door should be locked.
2 When the power is switched off, do not simultaneously
press any key (on the MDI panel or the machine operator’s
panel) other than the POWER OFF key.
3 An automatic power disconnect function is available. It
turns the power off automatically at the end of a program
(M30). (See Section IV–17.)
69
3. EMERGENCY STOP ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
3 EMERGENCY STOP
This button is used to instantly stop the movement of the machine at the
time of an emergency.
If the machine shows unexpected operation, all operation of the machine
can be stopped by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button.
When the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed, the following events
occur:
(a) All moving axes stop immediately.
(b) The rotating spindle stops immediately.
Coolant stops its operation. And all the automatic operation nor
manual operation become unoperable state.
(c) The control unit is reset and the machine alarm status is assumed.
(d) The Z axis slightly descends.
If the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed while tool change is in
progress, the following takes place depending on the status of operation:
(a) If the spindle orientation is in progress, the spindle stops
immediately.
(b) If the Z axis is ascending, the Z axis stops moving immediately and
the spindle is freed from the controlled status.
(c) If the turret is rotating, it stops quickly.
(d) If the Z axis is descending, the Z axis stops moving immediately and
the spindle is freed from the controlled status.
(See Section V–4” for recovering the machine after pressing the
EMERGENCY STOP button during the tool change job.)
Fig.3 EMERGENCY STOP Button
The EMERGENCY STOP button is locked when it is pressed. It is

unlocked when it is turned clockwise.
NOTE
1 The emergency stop operation should be done before
anything else when danger arises. Be prepared to press the
button whenever necessary.
2 The emergency stop causes electric current to the motors
to be cut off.
3 Before releasing the emergency stop, remove the cause of
the problem.
70
4. OPENING/CLOSING
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR
4 OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR
The FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series monitors the state of the

splash–guard front door (safety door), using a controller.
To assure safe use of the machine, there are restrictions on the operation
of the machine with the safety door open. During machine operation,
unlocking the safety door (pressing the <DOOR> key on the operator’s
panel) suspends the operation. This function is known as a splash–guard
door interlock function.
Electromagnetic
lock swich
Front door
α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe
Electromagnetic lock swich
Front door
α–T14/21iCSe
71
4. OPENING/CLOSING
THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
4.1 The safety door is equipped with a lock mechanism, which usually
prevents the door from opening. Performing either of the following steps
LOCKING THE unlocks the door, allowing you to open it.
SAFETY DOOR D Press the <DOOR> key.
D Issue M02 or M30 (if bit 6 of PMC parameter K12 = 1).
When the safety door is unlocked, the <DOOR> key LED on the
operator’s panel lights.
Performing the following steps locks the safety door.

When the safety door is open:
D Close the safety door.
When the safety door is closed (but not locked):
D Press the <DOOR> key on the operator’s panel.
When the safety door is locked, the <DOOR> key LED on the operator’s
panel goes off.
(If the safety door is released immediately before it is completely closed,
the operator message “2004 DOOR IS UNLOCKED FORCIBLY” is
displayed. This message, however, does not indicate a failure.)
In the following cases, the safety door cannot be unlocked.

D Within about 20 seconds after the power is turned on.
D When the spindle or an axis is moving.
D When an alarm occurs for the spindle or an axis, and safety cannot
be confirmed.
72
4. OPENING/CLOSING
4.2 The following restrictions are placed on the operation of the machine with
the safety door open.
RESTRICTIONS ON
1) Automatic operation is impossible.
THE OPERATION OF 2) MDI operation is impossible.
THE MACHINE WITH 3) No coolant can be supplied. However, an air blow is output even
THE SAFETY DOOR when the safety door is open.
OPEN 4) Tool exchange is impossible.
5) There are speed limits to manual operation. Only the following
operations are possible.
D Spindle rotation of 100 min–1 or less (Machines designed to the
CE marking specification are excluded.)
D Manual X–, Y–, and Z–axis movement of 2 m/min or less
D Manual additional axis movement of 700 degrees/min or less
D Manual handle feed
6) During manual operation with the safety door open:
D If the mode is switched, the spindle and each axis stop.
D When the safety door is closed, the spindle and each axis stop.
73
4. OPENING/CLOSING
4.3 When the safety door is locked (closed), unlocking it (pressing the
<DOOR> button on the operator’s panel) stops the machine in the
IF THE SAFETY sequence stated below.
DOOR IS UNLOCKED 1) The spindle and axes are decelerated to a stop by effecting feed hold.
DURING OPERATION 2) If tool change is under way, the machine is stopped after the tool
change is completed.
3) Coolant and air blow output operations stop.
4) If rigid tapping is under way, after the drill bit reaches the hole bottom
or R point, the spindle and axes are decelerated to a stop with the rigid
mode retained.
5) If dwelling is under way, the dwelling is brought to a pause.
6) If spindle orientation is under way, the machine is stopped after the
orientation is finished.
To resume automatic operation, follow the steps below.
1) Close the safety door without doing anything else.(Closing the door
locks it automatically.)
If the door is closed but not locked, press the DOOR button on the
operator’s panel.
2) If the spindle was rotating when the safety door was opened, press the
spindle rotation button during the manual mode to cause the spindle
to start rotating. (If the spindle is not started to rotate, operator
message No. 2009 will be displayed when the start button is pressed,
in which case it is impossible to resume automatic operation.)
3) If coolant and air blow output operations are performed, press the
coolant button then perform another coolant output operation. (If the
coolant button is not pressed, automatic operation is resumed with no
coolant supplied when the start button is pressed.)
4) Select the operation mode, and press the start button.
74
4. OPENING/CLOSING
4.4
OPENING AND (1) To open the door when the power is off, use the LOCK/UNLOCK
key.
CLOSING THE DOOR
(2) When the power is on, do not use the LOCK/UNLOCK key to open
WHEN THE POWER the door.
IS OFF If you open the door with the unlock key, the message “2004 DOOR
IS UNLOCKED FORCIBLY” is displayed.
(3) When the power is off, no operator is allowed to open the door.
(4) If you need to open the door when the power is off, ask the
maintenance personnel.
(5) To open the door when the power is off, the maintenance personnel
must use the LOCK/UNLOCK key, which is managed by the sector
in charge of maintenance. Do no leave the key attached to the door.
KEY
Electromagnetic lock swich
Unlocked state Locked state
75
4. OPENING/CLOSING
4.5 A machine operation related to the locking/unlocking of the safety door

can be selected.
SWITCHING OF
SAFETY DOOR LOCK (1) Safety door control when machining ends
Whether to unlock the safety door when machining ends can be
CONTROL selected.
PMC
Setting Function
parameter
K11.7 *0 When M00/M01 is specified, the safety door is not unlocked.
1 When M00/M01 is specified, the safety door is unlocked.
K12.6 0 When M02/M30 is specified, the safety door is not unlocked.
*1 When M02/M30 is specified, the safety door is unlocked.
The settings marked with * are factory settings.

When an automatic door (option) is mounted, these parameters are
ignored (assumed to be set to 0).
(2) Safety door control in single–block operation
Whether to unlock the safety door automatically when operation
stops in the single–block operation mode can be selected.
PMC
Setting Function
parameter
K11.1 *0 The safety door is not unlocked when operation stops in the single–block operation mode.
1 The safety door is unlocked when operation stops in the single–block operation mode.
T82 (No.42) *2000(ms) Wait time from the stop of operation in the single–block operation mode until the safety door
is unlocked

(3) General safety door control
Whether the safety door is automatically unlocked when operation
stops in the single–block operation mode can be selected.
PMC
Setting Function
parameter
K12.7 *0 S The safety door is not unlocked when the power is turned on.
S The safety door is locked when the safety door is closed.
S The safety door is not locked when automatic operation/MDI operation is started.
S The safety door is not unlocked after a tool change is made using the tool change button
on the operator’s panel.
1 S The door is unlocked when the power is turned on.

S The door is not locked even when the safety door is closed.
S The safety door is locked when automatic operation/MDI operation is started.
S The safety door is unlocked after a tool change is made using the tool change button on
the operator’s panel.
76
4. OPENING/CLOSING
4.6
SAFETY Before opening the safety door, make sure that the Z–axis does not
PRECAUTIONS come down.
The Z–axis (spindle head) comes down once in a while because of the
Z–axis brake failing to work. Before opening the safety door, make sure
that the Z–axis does not come down.
When the safety door is open, be careful that the Z–axis may come down.
During maintenance underneath the Z–axis, place a wooden block
between the table and spindle head so that the Z–axis will not come down
even if the brake fails to work.
Be careful when opening the safety door with the power switched
off.
Before opening the safety door with the power switched off, make sure
that the Z–axis (spindle head) does not come down.
77
5. MOUNTING TOOLS ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
5 MOUNTING TOOLS
Confirm that all cutters to be used are firmly held on the tools and that the
cutters have no abnormal wear or chips.
The used tools must not exceed the maximum tool diameter, the
maximum tool length, or the maximum tool weight. For details of the
tools that may be used and for the installation of tools, see Section I–3,
“TOOLS”.
Install each tool by pushing it into the respective grip until it stops.
After mounting the tools, check whether they are firmly installed.
Install the tools so that they are well–distributed over the turret, and so that
there is no gross imbalance of weight.
78
6. MOUNTING JIGS AND
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS WORKPIECES
6 MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES
To fix the jigs on the table, the T–bolt having the nominal diameter of 14
mm (as specified in JIS B 1166) or the T–nut having the nominal diameter
of 14 mm (as specified in JIS B 1167) can be used.
Using a T–bolt Using a T–nut
Before starting automatic running, confirm the following:

(a) Confirm that the jigs are firmly fixed on the table.
(b) Confirm that the workpieces are firmly fixed on the jigs. Especially,
when an air cylinder jig is used, confirm that the necessary air
pressure is obtained.
NOTE
1 The maximum load capacity of the α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe
table is 250 kg and of the α–T14/21iCSe table is 150 kg.
2 When the load to be placed on the table weights 100 kg or
more, change the setting of “permissible mass of
workpiece” to “more than 100 kg” on the QUICK screen. If
operation is continued with “less than 100 kg” set, a servo
alarm may be generated.
79
6. MOUNTING JIGS AND
WORKPIECES ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
Set table load
80
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 7. COOLANT SUPPLY
7 COOLANT SUPPLY
Check that the amount of coolant is sufficient. If the amount of coolant

is insufficient, add some in the manner shown below:
Some water soluble coolants solidify when the stock solution is put into
water or coolant solution. When water soluble coolant is used, use
another container to thin the stock solution well before pouring it into the
tank.
If the coolant is water soluble, a substantial portion of coolant reduction
is caused by the evaporation of water. If no degradation of quality is
noticed, only adding water may be necessary.
NOTE
Do not spill water into the splash guard. Water can cause
corrosion.
81
8. PREPARING PROGRAMS
[CNC OPERATION] ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
8 PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION]
Call the program according to the following procedure.
Press to select [CNC operation].
(1) Press the mode selection key to put the machine in the
operation mode (MEM).
(2) Press and in the stated sequence to select the program

screen.
(3) Call the program by specifying its program number.
Example) To call O0010, press and in the stated

sequence to select the soft key “O search” on the screen.
Program O0010 will be called.
NOTE
If O0010 is not found, an alarm is issued. Press the reset
key and enter the program number again.
This is the end of preparation for automatic operation.
82
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 9. TRIAL RUN
9 TRIAL RUN
The following functions can be used for trial run.

(a) SINGLE BLOCK
Single block is the function that executes one block of the program
each time the CYCLE START button is pressed.
(1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key to set the single block.
One block of the program is executed and the machine tool stops.
When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the next block is
executed and the machine tool stops.
To release the single block mode press the SINGL BLOCK key
again.
NOTE
1 For G28 and G29, after the single block is executed, the
machine tool stops even during machining.
2 The single block stop point in a canned cycle is any of the
end point 1, 2, or 6 in the figure shown below.
1
2 6
3 5
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
4
3 For a tool change sequence, the machine tool stops at the

specified point and the FEED HOLD lamp lights.
83
9. TRIAL RUN ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
(b) DRY RUN

When dry run is effected, the F–function specified in the program is
ignored and the feedrate is set to the maximum jog feedrate at rapid
traverse or cutting feed command.
Dry run key
NOTE
1 During tool change operation, the dry run function cannot be
turned on/off.
2 The rapid traverse rate can be held as it is by changing the
sixth bit (RDRN) of parameter 1401 from 1 to 0. For details,
refer to the NC Operator’s Manual.
(c) MACHINE LOCK

By making the machine lock on, the machine tool can be displayed
as if it were moving although it is not. The display changes
momentarily at the specified speed. This operation support function
is used for program check.
To switch machine lock, operate with the quick screen ”SEQ.
SELECTION.
NOTE
1 Even if the G27 or G28 command is executed, the reference
position LED (HOME) does not light because the machine
tool does not move to the reference position.
2 All M and S functions except M06 (tool change command)
are executed.
3 After executing a machine lock operation, be sure to turn the
power off then back on.
84
(d) Z AXIS LOCK

When the Z AXIS LOCK is on, only the Z axis enters the machine
lock status. This Z axis lock is useful in checking the program
contents by drawing the axis movement with a ball–point pen.
To switch Z axis lock, operate with the quick screen ”SEQ.
SELECTION.
NOTE
1 Even when the G27 or G28 command is executed, the
reference position lamp does not light because the machine
tool does not move to the reference position.
2 The M–function and the S–function are executed. (Only the
tool change command, M06, is not executed.)
3 After executing a Z–axis lock operation, be sure to turn the
power off then back on.
(e) RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE
An override of 100%, 25%, or LOW can be applied. If an override

of 25% is applied when the rapid traverse rate is 48 m/min, the rapid
traverse rate becomes about 12 m/min. When an override of LOW
is applied, the fixed rapid traverse rate 400 mm/min is used. A rapid
traverse command for applying this override is as follows:
(1) Rapid traverse by G00
(2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle
(3) Rapid traverse at G27, G28, or G29
(4) Manual rapid traverse
(5) Rapid traverse for manual return to the reference position
(6) Rapid traverse in tool change sequence
The following operations are related to the trial run: (For details of
each operation, see Section III–3, “EMERGENCY STOP” and
Section IV–5.4, “Settings and Operations of Automatic Running.”)
(a) CYCLE START
Operation is started by pressing the CYCLE START button. When
the CYCLE START button is pressed in the feed hold mode,
operation is restarted.
CYCLE START button
(b) FEED HOLD
85
9. TRIAL RUN ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
When the FEED HOLD button is pressed, traverse of the axes stops
during traverse. For restart, press the CYCLE START button.
The status of stopping by the feed hold function is called “feed hold
status”.)
FEED HOLD button
(c) RESET
Automatic running is suspended by pressing the <RESET> key. The
<RESET> key is used for other purposes, such as releasing the alarm.
<RESET> key
Trial run is performed using the functions described above.

Generally, the dry run function need not be used when a proven
machining program is used. Dry run is useful for checking that the
F values in the program are appropriate or for conducting a trial run
to check the operation of a program that is used for the first time.
The following is the description of an example of a normal trial run:
(1) Show the program screen in the AUTO mode, and call the
program to be used.
+ Number input + [O.SRH]

Calling a program
Memory mode button Program screen
(2) Enable the single block function and apply rapid traverse override
25%.
Single block enabled Rapid traverse feedrate override 25%
(3) Press the CYCLE START button as necessary, and check each
operation of the program. (If you encounter an unexpected
operation, immediately press the FEED HOLD button.)
86
CYCLE START button
FEED HOLD button
(4) At a position where the workpiece and the tool are close to each
other, set the rapid traverse override to LOW.
Rapid traverse override LOW
(5) Stop operation by pressing the FEED HOLD button just before
the workpiece and the tool contact each other. Check the depth
of the cut, the workpiece coordinate system, the cutter
compensation in the program, and the remaining traverse amount
of the current block that is displayed on the program check screen.
Check the depth of cut, remaining

traverse amount, etc.
(6) Confirm that the machining status is not abnormal in the

machining block.
(7) When a series of machining checks have been finished and the
program has been executed, the trial run ends.
(8) Disable the single block function, apply the 100% rapid traverse
feedrate override, and perform regular operation.
Single block disabled 100% rapid traverse override
87
10. AUTOMATIC RUNNING
10 AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]
Machine operation that follows the program is called automatic running.

The starting, stopping, and restarting procedure of automatic running is
described in this section. (For details of each operation, see Section IV–5,
“AUTOMATIC RUNNING.”)
88
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS [CNC OPERATION]
10.1 (1) Show the program screen in the memory mode and call the program
to be used.
STARTING
AUTOMATIC
RUNNING Number input + [O.SRH]
+
Calling a program
Memory mode button Program screen
(2) Press the CYCLE START button.
When the CYCLE START button is pressed, automatic running

starts, and the CYCLE START lamp lights.
89
10.2 The feed hold function or the single block function stops automatic
running.
STOPPING
AUTOMATIC (a) Stop by feed hold function
RUNNING
When the FEED HOLD button is pressed, automatic running stops,

and the FEED HOLD lamp lights.
At the same time, the CYCLE START lamp goes off.
(b) Stop by single block function
When the single block function is enabled, the machine atops after
executing one block of the program. When the CYCLE START
button is pressed again, the machine stops after executing another
block.
90
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS [CNC OPERATION]
10.3 Press the CYCLE START button again to restart automatic running.
RESTARTING
AUTOMATIC
RUNNING
When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the automatic running

restarts, and the CYCLE START lamp lights. At the same time, the
FEED HOLD lamp goes off.
91
11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
11 POWER SHUTOFF METHODS
92
B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS
11.1 Removing the hose from the supply inlet or closing the regulator pressure
adjustment valve shuts off the air supply.
AIR SUPPLY
SHUTOFF METHOD
Regulator
Pressure adjustment valve

(to be pulled up and turned)
Top view
Air supply inlet
Compressed air is used as a spindle taper air blower.

The residual pressure can be released by closing the regulator pressure
adjustment valve.
93
11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
11.2 Setting the main circuit breaker handle on the rear of the machine shuts
off all electric power supplies on the secondary side of the circuit breaker.
ELECTRIC POWER Note that the power on the primary side remains live. Also keep in mind
SUPPLY SHUTOFF that the following units may be connected to the primary side of the main
METHOD circuit breaker.
1. External power supply transformer (if provided)
2. Non–standard peripheral unit (if installed)
Controller rack
94
IV. DETAILED OPERATIONS
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. QUICK SCREEN
1 QUICK SCREEN
97
1. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
1.1 “QUICK SCREEN” is the exclusive screen to ROBODRILL. By using

QUICK SCREEN, it is possible to operate the machine and to create a
OVERVIEW machining program even if a operator is not used to CNC operation. And
a operator who is used to CNC operation well, too, can perform various
operations by using QUICK SCREEN easily.
98
1.2
CONSTITUTION OF
QUICK SCREEN
1.2.1 QUICK SCREEN is constituted as follows.

Overview
11: COORDINATES/OFFSET
12: DATA I/O

SET UP
13: TOOL LIFE
14: PALLET SETTING (Note 1)
21: AUTOMATIC OPERATION
1: MENU 22: QUICK C. A. P. (Note 2)

OPERATION
23: QUICK EDITOR (Note 3)
2: MENU OPERATION
24: COUNTER
31: SEQ. SELECTION
MAINTENANCE 32: MAINTENANCE SETTING
33: DIAGNOSE / ALARM
NOTE
1 Option
2 For conversational programming screens, see Section 13, “QUICK CONVERSATIONAL
PROGRAMMING” and Section 36, “MANUAL GUIDE” in Part IV.
3 A detailed explanation is provided in manual of Appendix IV–12. QUICK EDTIOR.
99
1.2.2
Descriptions of Screen (1) (2) (3)
Displays
(4)
(5)
(6)
(9) (10)
(7) (8)
(1) Screen name

The number and name of the currently selected QUICK SCREEN are
displayed.
(2) Selected program number
The number of the currently selected program is displayed.
(3) Current time
The current date and time are displayed.
(4) Cursor
The selected entry item is indicated. The cursor is moved using the
cursor keys on the operator’s panel.
(5) Display of an entered value or operation guidance message
The data entered from the operator’s panel is displayed.
If an entered value or selected soft key is invalid, a guidance message
is displayed.
(6) Display of maximum and minimum values
A range of values that can be entered to an item where the cursor is
set is indicated.
(7) Screen switching soft keys
These soft keys are used to select a QUICK SCREEN.
(8) Function selection soft keys
These soft keys are used to select a function on an individual screen.
(9) Screen group display soft key
This soft key is used to display a screen group name at (7) when the
display is switched to the screen of a different group (for example,
from COORDINATES SCREEN “SET UP” group) to AUTOMATIC
OPERATION SCREEN “OPERATION” group.
100
(10)Function selection switching soft key

This soft key is used to switch functions displayed on the function
selection soft keys (8). It is used if a screen has many functions. (This
soft key is usable when it has a triangle mark.)
1.2.3 The following three methods can be used for QUICK SCREEN
switching:
Screen Switching
Methods D Soft keys
D Screen number and PAGE key
D <MENU> (<MDI>) key
1.2.3.1 The left–side six soft keys are used for screen switching.
Soft Key–triggered
Screen Switching [Example: Switching from the 11:COORDINATES/OFFSET SCREEN
to the 23:QUICK EDITOR SCREEN]
Screen group names are displayed on the respective

PRESS screen switching soft keys.
PRESS
The menu of “OPERATION” group is displayed on

SOFT–KEYS for screen change.
PRESS
The QUICK EDITOR SCREEN is displayed.
1.2.3.2 Numeral and page (previous or next page) keys are used for screen
Screen Number and switching.
PAGE Key Triggered [Example Switching to the 21:AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN]
Screen Switching Click the <2>, <1>, and <PAGE key> in the stated sequence, because the
screen number of the AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN is 21.
101
1.2.3.3 In addition to the methods described above, a special key can be used to
MENU OPERATION display the MENU OPERATION SCREEN; no other screens can be
displayed using a special key.
Key–triggered Screen
When a QUICK SCREEN is displayed, pressing the <MENU> (<MDI>)
Switching key on the operator’s panel displays the MENU OPERATION SCREEN.
102
1.3
EXPLANATION OF
EACH SCREEN
1.3.1 The constitution of QUICK SCREEN is displayed.

Menu Screen The position of each screen is seen by displaying this screen.
(This screen is displayed by pressing “1” and PAGE KEY (Y or B).)
(1)
(2)
Item Contents
1 SCREEN GROUP QUICK SCREEN is classified into three groups, i. e.

SET UP, OPERATION, and MAINTENANCE.
2 NAME AND The number and name of the screen in each group
NUMBER OF are displayed.
EACH SCREEN
103
1.3.2 This screen is used to perform one block running by conversational

Menu Operation operations. (Correspondence to MDI running on CNC SCREEN.)
It is possible to run the machine tool by inputting data in accordance with
instructions easily even if a operator is not used to CNC operation.
Item Contents
1 TOOL CHANGE This function is used to change a tool for another

by conversational operations.
The guidance is displayed on screen. Input data
and press CYCLE START button in accordance
with the instructions. Then TOOL CHANGE will be
finished.
2 AXES MOVE- This function is used to move axes to arbitrary posi-

MENT tion by conversational operations.
The guidance is displayed on screen. Input data
and press CYCLE START button in accordance
with the instructions. Then MOVEMENT OF AXES
will be finished.
3 SPINDLE This function is intended to rotate and stop the

REVOLUTIONS spindle easily, using menus.
A specified operation is performed when you enter
data according to guidance messages displayed on
the screen and press the CYCLE START button.
4 RESTORATION This function is intended to make a reference posi-

TO THE tion return for a specified axis easily, using menus.
REFERENCE A reference position return for the specified axis is
POINT completed when you operate according to guid-
ance messages displayed on the screen.
5 CANCEL This function is intended to cancel a canned cycle,

cutter compensation, and tool length compensation
easily, using menus.
A specified item is canceled when you select the
item according to guidance messages displayed on
104
Item Contents
6 EXTERNAL SIG- This function is intended to output M codes easily,

NAL using menus.
A specified signal is output when you enter data
according to guidance messages displayed on the
screen and press the CYCLE START button.
7 CLAMP This function is intended to clamp and unclamp

additional axes easily, using menus.
A specified operation is performed when you select
the corresponding item according to guidance mes-
sages displayed on the screen and press the
CYCLE START button.
8 NC LANGUAGE This function is intended to execute NC language

commands for one block easily, using menus.
A specified operation is performed when you enter
data according to guidance messages displayed on
To perform an operation described above, enter the corresponding

number, from 1 to 8.
105
1.3.3 This screen enables you to set up a workpiece coordinate system, a tool
Coordinate/Tool compensation amount, and table payload. It can also be used to save and
restore the data you set up.
Compensation
(1)
(2) (6)
(4) (3) (5)
Item Contents
1 GRAPHICAL The present position of tool and the origin of work-

DISPLAY piece coordinate system are displayed graphically.
2 WORK Input the workpiece coordinate system number.

COORDINATE
SYSTEM
3 AUTOMATIC The current machine position can be set as the ori-

SETTING gin of the workpiece coordinate system. A position
determined by adding desired adjustment values to
the current machine coordinates can also be set.
The following WINDOW is displayed by pressing
[AUTO SET] of SOFT–KEY.
Clicking the [X–EXEC] or [Y–EXEC] soft key auto-

matically sets up, as a workpiece coordinate sys-
tem origin, the sum of the current machine coordi-
nate and adjustment value for an individual axis.
Supplement) When adding the Z–axis to the auto-
matic workpiece coordinate system
setting, set the following parameter:
PMC parameter keep relay K0 bit 2 = 1
106
Item Contents
4 SETUP FILE This screen enables you to save and restore all
setup data (such as workpiece coordinate system,
tool compensation amount, and tool life manage-
ment data) and machining programs at a time, thus
curtailing the required setup time.
Clicking the SET UP FILE soft key displays a list of
setup files in a window as shown below. The cur-
sor can be used to select one of 30 setup files. The
selected file can be called, registered, and deleted.
(a) (b) (c)
Item Contents
a READ The selected setup file is read from storage

memory and used for automatic setting of the setup
data. If the setup file contains a program, it is pos-
sible to select whether to save the program to the
CNC memory. If a program included in the file list is
available, it is called and set at the start position.
This is, however, impossible if the program is not in
memory.
107
Item Contents
b REGISTER Clicking the REGISTER soft key displays the win-

dow and soft keys that can be used for registration.
Enter the target file name and program number,
and the date, then click the #29–3 soft key.
The following data can be saved.
@ Workpiece coordinate system, workpiece coor-
dinate system offset, and 48 workpiece coordi-
nate systems (option)
(300 workpiece coordinate systems (optional)
are not stored.)
@ Tool compensation amount (length–figure,
length–wear, radius–figure, and radius–wear
when the option for tool compensation memory
C is selected)
@ Table payload
@ Magazine data tool management number
@ TOOL LIFE AI tool monitor setting and tool
group setting
@ PRODUCT MANAGEMENT function (ON/
OFF), name, and M code
@ PALLET SETTING machining program number
(option)
@ Machining programs (whether to register them
can be selected, and the maximum registerable
size is 17 Kbytes.)
c DELETE The SET UP FILE data registered in a memory can

be deleted.
108
Item Contents
5 OFFSET Clicking the OFFSET soft key displays the window

that can be used for tool compensation amount
setting as shown below. Move the cursor to the
desired number, using the cursor and page keys,
and enter a compensation amount.
Also available is a function that automatically sets
the current Z–axis machine coordinates as a com-
pensation amount. (AUTO SET soft key)
Supplement) Length–figure, length–wear, radius–

figure, and radius–wear data can be
displayed/input when the option for
tool compensation memory C is se-
lected.
6 TABLE PAYLOAD Select the [>=100kg] or [<100kg] soft key.

@ [<100kg] R If the total load (such as workpiece
and jigs) on the table is not heavier than
approximately 100 kg.
@ [>=100kg] R If the total load on the table is 100
kg or heavier.
109
1.3.4 This screen enables you to transfer data (such as machining programs and
parameters) with a memory card and floppy disk. It also enables you to
Data I/O Screen set up a data server and remote buffer for use.
(2)
(3)
(1)
Item Contents
1 MENU This screen enables you to transfer data (such as

machining programs and parameters) with a
memory card and floppy disk. It also enables you
to set up a data server and remote buffer for use.
2 I/O channel Select the location to which an input/output device

is connected.
CH1–0 : RS–232C on the operator’s panel
CH1–1 : RS–232C on the operator’s panel
Memory card : Memory card slot beside the LCD.
Select this when data is input to or
output from a memory card.
Remote buffer: Reader/punch panel (optional) in
the control cabinet. Select this
when using a remote buffer.
Data server : Data server (optional). Select this
to enable programmed operation by
a data server.
3 COMMUNICATION Several pieces of parameter on DATA I/O and their

PARAMETER present values are displayed in this section. And
parenthesized values are standard ones.
Each value can be modified by pressing [CHANGE
PARAM] of SOFT–KEY. By pressing [CHANGE
PARAM], cursor is displayed and a display of
SOFT–KEY is changed for [I/O SELECT].
After modifications, press [END] of SOFT–KEY.
110
* PROGRAM and SET UP FILE

If PROGRAM or SET UP FILE is selected, the following screen is
displayed and then data can be written or read easily by using FANUC
Handy File or FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTER or a Memory card.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Item Contents
1 CNC PROGRAM If you select “1: PROGRAM”, the CNC program list
LIST (SET UP appears. If you select “9: SETUP FILE”, the Set up
FILE LIST) file list appears.
2 FILE LIST File list in a floppy disk or a memory card is dis-

played by pressing [FILE LIST] of SOFT–KEY.
Up to 200 files can be displayed.
3 WRITE CNC PROGRAM or SET UP FILE in a CNC

memory can be written in a floppy disk or a memory
card.
4 READ A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be read

in a CNC memory.
5 RENAME FILE A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be re-

named.
6 DELETE FILE A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be de-

leted.
7 END This screen is closed, by pressing [END] of SOFT–

KEY.
NOTE
1 Communication parameter has to be standard setting,
except for I/O channel and baud rate.
2 “Multivolume file” cannot be treated.
3 As a memory card, use an SRAM card/ATA card. (The
FROM card cannot be used.)
111
1.3.5 This screen enables you to set data related to the AI tool monitor function.
Tool Life Management
Screen
(5)
(1)
(2) (3) (4)
(6) (7) (8) (9)
Item Contents
1 AI TOOL Specify whether to use the AI tool monitor function.

MONITOR OFF : The AI tool monitor function is disabled.
ON : The AI tool monitor function is enabled
according to the setting of 2 through 4.
2 FILE No. SETTING Set a reference load data file number for each tool.
Pressing the FILE key causes a file number to be
displayed on the screen.
3 OPERATION Select the machine operation to be performed

WHEN WARNING when spindle load w warning–level load.
LOAD IS OFF : Machining is continued as is.
REACHED
FEED DOWN : Tool movement is decelerated to
reduce the load on the tool. Ma-
chining is continued.
TOOL CHNG : Machining is continued; when the
next tool change command is spe-
cified, the tool is changed to a re-
served tool registered in the same
group.
DOWN+CHNG : Tool movement is decelerated;
when the next tool change com-
mand is specified, the tool is
changed to a reserved tool regis-
tered in the same group.
MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped, and the tool
is moved along the Z–axis to the
machine zero point. Moreover,
spindle rotation and coolant output
are stopped, and an alarm is dis-
played.
112
Item Contents
4 OPERATION Select a machine operation to be performed when

WHEN spindle load w breakage–level load.
BREAKAGE LOAD OFF : Machining is continued as is.
IS REACHED (AI
tool monitor MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped, and the tool
function) is moved along the Z–axis to the
machine zero point. Moreover,
spindle rotation and coolant output
are stopped, and an alarm is dis-
played.
5 MONITORED IN- This box displays monitored information (such as

FORMATION DIS- the load information and tool group information
PLAYS OR about the tool in current use) or a list of spindle load
SPINDLE LOAD level files.
LEVEL FILE LIST-
ING
6 REFERENCE When the [SPNDL LOAD] soft key is pressed, the

LOAD following windows are displayed:
CALCULATION
AND
REGISTRATION
INTO FILE
After moving the cursor to an item related to the

target file number with the page and cursor keys,
clicking the [CALC.] soft key calculates the WARN-
ING and BREKAGE values from a DETECTED and
N–DIA. set up for the file number. To set the ob-
tained values in a file, click the [ENTRY] soft key.
A value can be entered directly in an item indicated
by the cursor.
7 SWITCHING BE- This soft key selects a list of spindle load level files
TWEEN THE or monitored information as a display in the right
SPINDLE LOAD section of the screen ((5)).
LEVEL FILE LIST If monitored information is displayed, clicking the
AND THE MON- FILE soft key displays a list of spindle load level
ITORED–IN- files. If a list of spindle load level files is displayed,
FORMATION DIS- clicking the [MONITOR] soft key displays monitored
PLAY information.
If monitored information is displayed, clicking the
page key changes the display to another tool
group. If a list of spindle load level files is dis-
played, clicking the page key changes the display
to another file number.
8 CLEAR TOOL Information (such as use status and lifetime), cur-

INFORMATION rently being displayed about the tools in a tool
group, is cleared.
9 TOOL GROUP When the [TOOL GROUP] soft key is pressed, the
SETTING window shown below is displayed.
113
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13) (14)
(15) (16)
Item Contents
10 GROUP No. GROUP No. is changed from 1 to 14 by pressing

PAGE KEY.
The maximum number of groups and the maximum
number of tools that can be registered per group
can be changed by setting the following NC param-
eters:
No.6800 No.6800 Maximum Maximum
bit 1 bit0 number of number of
groups tools
0 0 16 16
0 1 32 8
1 0 64 4
1 1 128 2
The maximum number of groups and maximum

number of tools are factory–set as follows:
T14iC series: Maximum number of groups = 16,
maximum number of tools = 16
T21iC series: Maximum number of groups = 32,
maximum number of tools = 8
11 LIFE Specify the value of tool life of each group.

TOOL LIFE LIMIT Specifies the timing when the tool life expiration
(BY CYCLE advance notice signal is to be output. The signal is
QUANTITY OR output when the number of times or the duration
TIME) TO that the last tool was used becomes greater than or
TRIGGER AN equal to: Tool life (by cycle quantity or time) minus
EXPIRATION tool life limit (by cycle quantity or time) to trigger an
ADVANCE expiration advance notice
NOTICE
12 USED COUNT or The present USED COUNT or TIME is

TIME displayed graphically.
Clicking the USED COUNT ([USED TIME]) soft key
changes USED COUNT (TIME).
114
Item Contents
13 TOOL The state of the tool is displayed in TOOL IN-

INFORMATION FORMATION as “USING”, “LIFE”, or “WARNING”.
(Note) “USING” : tool which is on use in the
group.
“LIFE” : tool which arrived at the life.
“WARNING” : tool whose spindle load value
detected by tool monitor func-
tion was beyond the warning
value.
14 T–CODE, Set the tool number (T–CODE) that belongs to the

H–CODE, and target group, the tool length compensation number
D–CODE (H–CODE) for the target tool, and the cutter com-
pensation value number (D–CODE) as required.
Enter 0 for an item if it is not used.
15 CHANGE OF Select COUNT or TIME as a means to judge TOOL

JUDGEMENT OF LIFE by pressing [LIFE JUDGE.] of SOFT–KEY.
TOOL LIFE
16 CLEARANCE OF It is possible to strike off TOOL INFORMATION in

TOOL the group.
INFORMATION
1.3.6 If a machining program number is set up for each of workpieces mounted

Pallet Setting Screen on two pallets (A and B) in advance, the machining programs can be
automatically called and executed.
(Option)
(1)
(2)
(3)
115
Item Contents
1 SETTINGS OF Specify a machining program number for each pal-

MACHINING let (A and B).
PROGRAM The specified program numbers are set to the fol-
lowing macro variables respectively.
#998 : A machining program number for the pal-
let A.
#999 : A machining program number for the pal-
let B.
The machining program number for the current pal-
let on the table is set in #990.
(NOTE 1) Do not use the macro variables above
(#990, #998, and #999) for other use.
(NOTE 2) Create a machining program as a sub-
program.
2 USE OF THE Specify whether the work number search function is

WORK NUMBER used for each pallet.
SEARCH ON ³ The work number search function is used.
FUNCTION In other words, the specified program num-
ber (1) is set to #990 after pallet change
and then the program is called and
executed.
OFF ³ The work number search function is not
used.
In this case, the number “9023” is set to
#990 after pallet change and then the pro-
gram “O9023” is called and executed.
(O9023 is already registered and no ma-
chining is performed by O9023. )
The program O9023 is registered before-

hand.
Do not modify the program.
An example of main program is shown below.
* main program
*
O0001 ;
M65 ; ² M code for pallet changing operation.

M98 P#990 ; ² Calling of a machining program (subprogram)
corresponding to the pallet on the table.
M01 ;
² The program is stopped when M01 STOP
button on the operator’s panel is ON.
M99 ; ² Return to the head of a program.
3 DISPLAY OF Alarms occurred to the pallet changer are dis-

ALARM ON played.
PALLET
CHANGER [Varieties of alarm]
SAFETY DOOR/PALLET SETTING DETECTION/

PALLET TRANSPORT /PALLET EXIST OR NOT/
LOCK– UNLOCK (PALLET–A) /LOCK–UNLOCK
(PALLET–B) /AUTOMATIC DOOR/PALLET UN-
CLAMP
116
1.3.7 This screen enables you to select the desired machining program and get
Automatic Operation it ready for operation.
It is useful to check a program because it displays a running program and
Screen magnifies the display of coordinate values.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5) (6) (1)
Item Contents
1 MAGNIFIED Workpiece coordinates, machine coordinates, or

COORDINATE remaining travel distance can be displayed in
DISPLAY large–size text.
Each time the [COORDINATE] soft key is pressed,
the magnified display changes as follows:
workpiece coordinates –> machine coordinates –>
remaining travel distance.
2 MONITOR The feedrate, spindle rotation speed, and spindle

DISPLAY load meter reading are displayed.
3 RUNNING In automatic operation (MEM) mode, the selected

PROGRAM program is displayed.
DISPLAY
4 MODAL Modal information is displayed.

INFORMATION
DISPLAY
5 PROGRAM Pressing the [PROG. SELECT] soft key displays a

SELECTION list of programs. A desired program can be
selected from the list.
6 PROGRAM When the [PROG. REWIND] soft key is pressed,

ACCESS the beginning of the current program is accessed.
117
1.3.8 This screen enables you to set up the production quantity count function.
Counter It also displays the current use status and elapsed operation time for all
tool groups.
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
118
Item Contents
1 PRODUCTION/ This box offers two counters for production quantity

QUALITY COUNT- counting.
ER FUNCTION : If the counter is to be used, set
this item to “ON”. If not, set it to
“OFF”.
NAME : An arbitrary name consisting of
numerals, alphabetic letters, and
symbols can be set up. To enter
alphabetic letters or symbols,
press the <ABC@@@Z> key on the
operator’s panel.
PARTS COUNT,TOTAL COUNT : These items rep-
resent the number of counted
products and the total number of
products, respectively. It is also
possible to enter a value in these
counters.
PARTS REQUIRED : The scheduled number of
products is entered in this item.
When the actual number of prod-
ucts reaches the scheduled num-
ber, it is possible to turn on a sta-
tus display lamp. The operator
message “PRODUCTION IS
COMPLETED” is displayed when
a scheduled number of products
are created.
PIECE COUNT : The number of products per cycle
(count scaling factor) is entered in
this item.
The two counters stated above
are incremented by a value en-
tered in PIECE COUNT.
M CODE : An M code for counting products
is selected using a soft key. When
the selected M code is issued, the
number of the current products
and the total number of products
are incremented. A dedicated M
code (M91 or M92) is available for
incrementing each of the two
counters.
2 TOOL COUNTER This box lists the tool number (T–CODE) of a tool in
current use, how many times or how long it was
used, and its service life value for all tool groups. If
a tool in current use is the last one in a tool group,
the tool number is prefixed with an asterisk (*).
The box enables you to check the use status of all
tool groups at a glance.
To set up tool groups, click the TOOL GROUP soft
key.
119
Item Contents
3 SERVICE TIME RUN TIME : The cumulative automatic opera-

tion time (excluding the time when
the machine is at a stop or pause)
is displayed.
CYCLE TIME : The duration of one cycle of auto-
matic operation (excluding the
time when the machine is at a
stop or pause) is displayed.
This value is automatically preset
with “0” when the cycle starts from
a reset state or when the power is
turned off.
4 TOOL GROUP This soft key enables you to set up tool groups.
SETTING This function is exactly the same as the tool group
setting on the TOOL LIFE.
See the descriptions about the TOOL LIFE for de-
tails.
1.3.9 This screen enables you to set up machine operation modes.

Sequence Selection
(1)
(2) (3)
120
Item Contents
1 FLOOD COOLANT Position the cursor to the desired setting item, then
INTERNAL LIGHT select the [ON] or [OFF] soft key.
BLOCK SKIP
AUTOMATIC OFF ON
POWER OFF
REMOTE MODE (When ON is selected, the switch graphic appears
TEACHING IN to have been “pressed,” and a black dot (S) appears
(from the in an upper–left corner of the switch graphic.)
preceding page) The functions of each item are as follows.
(1) Various kinds of setting
The following items can be set up.
Item Branch Functions
FLOOD ON Coolant is supplied by flood coolant

COOLANT unit.
(Option)
OFF Coolant is not supplied.
INTERNAL ON The internal light goes on.

LIGHT
OFF The internal light goes off.
REMOTE MODE ON The machine tool is run according

(Note 1) to a program stored in external
memory.
OFF The machine tool is run according

to a program stored in CNC
memory.
AUTOMATIC ON When M30 is specified, the power

POWER OFF to the CNC is turned off about five
(Note 1) seconds later.
(Note 2)
OFF The power of the CNC unit is not
turned off automatically.
OPTIONAL ON Commands in program blocks that

BLOCK SKIP contain a slash (/) are skipped.
(Note 1)
OFF Commands in program blocks that
contain a slash (/) are executed.
MACHINE OFF The machine runs as directed by

LOCK programs. (Normal operation)
ALL Programs are executed without run-
ning the machine. This is intended
to check the programs.
Each coordinate displayed on the
screen is updated according to
move commands. M and S func-
tions are executed.
Z Programs are executed without
movement along the Z–axis. This
is intended to check the programs.
OPTIONAL ON Commands in program blocks that

BLOCK SKIP contain a slash (/) are skipped.
(*1)
OFF Commands in program blocks that
contain a slash (/) are executed.
MACHINE OFF The machine runs as directed by

LOCK programs. (Normal operation)
ALL Programs are executed without run

run-
ning the machine. This is intended
to check the programs.
Each coordinate displayed on the
screen is updated according to
move commands. M and S func-
tions are executed.
Z Programs are executed without
movement along the Z–axis. This
is intended to check the programs.
121
Item Contents
Item Branch Functions
TEACHING IN ON The machine position obtained by

manual operation can be stored in
memory and can be used to create
a program.
OFF The above function cannot be used.
(NOTE) This item is not displayed for a full key-

board–type operator’s panel. Use the cor-
responding button on the operator’s panel.
2 REFERENCE FUNCTIONS
LOAD Clicking the FUNCTIONS displays the following
CALCULATION window.
AND
REGISTRATION
INTO FILE
AUTOMATIC Specify the automatic door control functions

DOOR CONTROL (F = ON f = OFF).
FUNCTION DOOR CLOSING BY START BUTTON:
SELECTION When the cycle start button on the
(Option) ROBODRILL operator’s panel is
pressed the door is automatically
closed and program operation is
started.
DOOR OPENING BY M30:
When M30 is specified, the door is
opened automatically.
DOOR OPENING BY M00, M01:
When M00 or M01 is specified,
the door is opened automatically.
AUTOMATIC This item enables you to set up connections for

POWER OFF effecting the automatic power shutoff function. Se-
lecting ON enables the following function.
POWER OFF BY ALARM:
The automatic power shutoff func-
tion works if an alarm condition
occurs.
RELEASE AT TURN ON THE POWER:
The automatic power shutoff func-
tion is set to OFF when the power
is turned on. (This function is un-
available to the full keyboard–type
operator’s panel.)
SPINDLE If the following conditions are all satisfied during the

SPEED(DOOR time set here (in minutes), the screen is erased to
OPEN) (except for protect the LCD.
the CE marking
specification)
122
Item Contents
SCREEN SAVER The screen display is cleared to prolong the life of

the LCD screen if no key input is made for the dura-
tion (in seconds) specified in this item. Set 0 when
this function is not to be used.
@ Neither a key (except some) on the operator’s
panel nor a soft key is operated.
@ No alarm or operator message is issued.
@ Both single–block and dry run modes are OFF.
If this function is not to be used, it must be reset to 0.
If either of the following functions is met after all dis-
plays on the screen are erased, they appear again.
@ A key (except some) on the operator’s panel or
a soft key is operated.
@ An alarm or operator message is issued.
INITIAL This item enables you to select the screen to be

SCREEN(POWER displayed when the power is turned on.
ON)
INITIAL This item enables you to select the status in which

OPE.MODE(PW the machine is to be when the power is turned on.
ON) MDI/LOW : The machine is in the MDI mode,
and the rapid traverse rate is LOW.
AUTO/100%: The machine is in the MEM mode,
and the rapid traverse rate is 100%.
M08 COMMAND Select the use of the M08 command between cool-
SELECTION ant control and air blow control.
COOLANT Select the use of the coolant button on the opera-

BUTTON tor’s panel between coolant control and air blow
SELECTION control.
3 BRIGHTNESS Set the brightness of background color to one of

ADJUSTMENT five supported levels. The standard background
color is the third one.
123
1.3.10 This window enables you to perform various types of maintenance and
MAINTENCE/SETTING setup.
To execute any function in this window, enter the corresponding number
(from 1 to 6).
Item Contents
1 TURRET RESTO. If the machine stops during tool change because of

an alarm being issued or the power being turned
off, it becomes necessary to restore the turret to the
normal position.
See Chapter 4, “Automatic Turret Restoration,” of
Part V for details.
2 MOTOR ORIGIN If the pulse coder cable is removed during motor

replacement, the controller loses the machine zero
point, resulting in an alarm being issued for a refer-
ence position return. In this case, it is necessary to
set the motor to the machine zero point.
See Chapter 3, “Servo Motor Zero Point Restora-
tion Method,” of Part V for details.
3 PARAMETER This function is used if all parameters have been

lost for some reason or you want to return the pa-
rameters to the values to which they were factory–
set. It can also be used to compare and check the
current parameter settings with the factory settings.
See Chapter 5, “Parameter Re–setting, Checking,
and Registering,” of Part V for details.
4 RIGID TAPPING This function is used in pulling out a tapping tool

from a workpiece if it has been caught in it.
See Chapter 6, “Rigid Tap Retracting,” of Part V for
details.
124
Item Contents
5 EXT.INTERFACE This function enables you to set up and use only

the desired signals on the terminal board of the RO-
BODRILL.
See Chapter 15, “External Interface Function,” of
Part IV for details.
6 COMMUNICATION This function enables you to set up the communica-

tion parameters that are needed in using the FAC-
TOLINK function.
See Chapter 26, “FACTOLINK Function”, of Part IV
for details.
125
1.3.11 This window enables you to check the cause of machine trouble.
DIAGNOSIS/ALARM
(2)
(3)
(1)
(4)
(5) (6)
Item Contents
1 ALARM,DIAG- These boxes display an alarm, diagnosis informa-

NOSTIC tion, or operator message.
See Appendixes 6 and 7 for details.
2 COORDINATE The workpiece coordinates, machine coordinates,

DISPLAY and remaining travel are displayed.
3 RUNNING PRO- In automatic operation (MEM) mode, the selected

GRAM DISPLAY program is displayed.
4 DIAGNOSTIC These items indicate the operating status of the

MONITOR machine. When a circle is yellow, it is active.
The detailed description about the cause is given in
(1).
Interlock : Axial movement inhibited
Hold : Program operation stopped
Reset : Reset state
Start inhibited : Program operation start inhibited
The detailed cause is displayed in 1.
5 ALARM/DIAG- Another page of the alarm/diagnostic display is dis-

NOSTIC DISPLAY played.
PAGE SWITCH
6 SAFETY MONI. This soft key enables you to monitor various signals
related to door lock control.
126
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 2. CREATING A PROGRAM
2 CREATING A PROGRAM
127
2. CREATING A PROGRAM DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
2.1
EDITING A
PROGRAM
2.1.1 (1) Put the system in the EDIT mode.

Creating a Program (2) Turn off the protect key.
(3) Press the + function key to display the PROGRAM

screen.
(4) Enter the number of a program, insert the necessary words
sequentially, then press the <INSERT> key.
128
2.1.2 A program can be modified by changing, inserting, or/and deleting words.

Modifying a Program Before modifying a program, select the EDIT mode and press the
+ key. When the PROGRAM screen is displayed, start the
following operation:
(1) To change a word
Cursor
Position the cursor on the word to be
modified using the cursor keys.
(Example)
Enter a new word.
Press the <ALTER> key.
129
(2) To insert a word
Cursor
Position the cursor on the word to be modified
using the cursor keys.
(Example)
Insert the necessary word.
Press the <INSERT> key.
130
(3) To delete a word
Cursor
Position the cursor on the word to be modified
using the cursor keys.
(Example)
Press the <DELETE> key.
(*) The cursor can be moved by one of the following three methods:
(1) By the cursor keys
Cursor
Press either of the cursor keys.
(2) By the S key

(Example) When moving the cursor to the next S address
or Press the S key, then press the

cursor key.
(3) By specifying the word
(Example) When moving the cursor to the next S800 word
Enter the word S800, then
press the cursor key.
131
2.1.3 (1) Select the EDIT mode.

Deleting a Program
(2) Press the + function key to display the PROGRAM
screen.
(3) For example, when the number of the program to be deleted is 01000,
enter then press the <DELET>
key.
2.1.4 (1) Put the system in the EDIT mode.

Checking Program (2) The contents of memory and the contents of programs are displayed
alternately by pressing the [O.SRH] key.
Nos. in Memory
2.1.5 (1) When the number of the program is not identified

Calling a Program in (1) Select the EDIT mode.
Memory
(2) Press the following keys: or [O.SRH]
(2) When the number of the program is identified

(1) Select the EDIT mode.
(2) For example, when the number of the program to be called is
O1000, press the following keys:
or [O.SRH]
NOTE
When the called program is not found, an alarm indication
appears on the screen. In this case, press the <RESET>
key to release the alarm.
132
2.2
PROGRAMMING
2.2.1 S codes are used for spindle speed control, M codes are used for ON/OFF
General of the various functions of the machine tool. When move command and
an S or M code are commanded in the same block, the S or M function
is executed simultaneously with the move command except some M
codes.
(Example 1) N1 G01 X50.0 Y–50.0 M03;
(Spindle rotation clockwise)
Y
The spindle starts to rotate clockwise
at the same time when the axes
begin to move.
50
50
Only commands M00, M01, M02, M05, M09 and M30 start to be
executed when the move command is finished.
(Example 2) N10 G01 X50.0 Y–50.0 M05; (Spindle stop)
Y
Spindle stops at the end of move com-
mand.
50
50
2.2.2 The spindle speed is directly controlled by address S and a following 2–

Spindle Speed to 4–digit number.
Function (S Function) (Example) S 150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 min–1
S 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,000 min–1
NOTE
Spindle speed can be specified ranging from 80 min–1 to
8,000 min–1 (standard), 150 to 15.000min–1 (15.000min–1
spindle) in increments of 1 min–1.
133
2.2.3 Up to three M codes can be specified at the same time. An M code not
Miscellaneous marked with * in the table below must be specified as the first M code.
Function (M Function)
Table 2.2.3 M Function
M code Name Meaning Sequence
M00 Program stop The machine stops after M00. D
M01 Optional stop The machine stops after M01. D
M02 End of program The machine finishes the program. D
M03 Spindle CW The spindle starts to rotate clockwise. I
M04 Spindle CCW The spindle starts to rotate counterclockwise. I
M05 Spindle STOP The spindle will stop. D
M06 Tool change A tool changed will be done. I
*M07 Air blow ON The air for chip will blow. I
*M08 Coolant ON The coolant oil will blow. I
*M09 Coolant OFF The coolant oil will stop. D
*M10 Clamp When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of addi-

tional axis specifications, the 4–axis is clamped.
*M11 Unclamp When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of addi-

M17 Touch Probe ON Turn on power to the touch probe. I
M18 Touch Probe OFF Turn off power to the touch probe. I
M19 Orientation The spindle sets the positioning. I
M20 Center–through coolant pump Stops the center–through coolant pump. I

OFF
M21 Center–through coolant pump Starts the center–through coolant pump. I

ON
M22 Center–through coolant ON Supplies coolant from the tool tip. I
M23 Air purge ON Outputs air from the tool tip. I
M24 Center–through coolant/air purge Stops center–through coolant/air purge. D

OFF
M28 Small hope peck drilling cycle ON Turns small–diameter, deep hole drilling cycle mode I
ON. (Option)
M29 Rigid mode Tapping cycle is rigid mode
M30 End of program The machine finishes the program. D
*M32 Peck cycle Triggers AI function no-load detection. I
*M33 Peck cycle Judges on AI function no-load detection. I
*M34 Peck cycle Ends AI function no-load detection. I
*M40 AI function disable Disables the AI function. I
*M41 AI function enable Enables the AI function. I
134
M code Name Meaning Sequence
M42 _ Used by the machine a menu. I
*M43 Tool life status check Checks current tool life status for processing. I
M44 Programmed data rewrite Sets the data of AI tool minitor. I
M45 _ Used by macroprogram 09029.
M46 _ Used by macroprogram 09029.
*M50 Air blow ON The air for chip will blow. I

(NOTE2)
M52 Not used
M53 Not used
Automatic door opening/closing In the case of splashguard B with automatic door opne-
*M60 to
and output signal ON until ing/closing specifications, the door opens/closes auto-
M65
answer comes matically.
*M71 The 4–axis clamp When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of addi-
*M72 The 4–axis unclamp When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of addi-
tional axis specifications, the 4–axis is unclamped.
*M73 X–axis mirror image ON X–axis turns the mirror image function ON.
*M74 Y–axis mirror image ON Y–axis turns the mirror image function ON.
*M76 The 4–axis mirror image ON The 4–axis turns the mirror image function ON.
*M77 Mirror image OFF Mirror image is OFF
M80 to For external interface See IV–15(5), ”M code output function”. I

M89
M90 Not used
*M91 Product control counter 1 Counts the amount of products for counter 1. I
*M92 Product control counter 2 Counts the amount of products for counter 2. I
M93 Not used
M94 Not used
M95 Not used
M96 Interruption type custom macro Enables the custom macro interrupt function. I
ON
M97 Interruption type custom macro Disables the custom macro interrupt function. I
OFF
M98 Calling of subprogram
M99 End of subprogram
M100 to For external interface See IV–15(5), ”M code output function”. I

M129
M198 Subprogram call from external

memory
135
NOTE
1 “I” and “D” in the column “Sequence” means as follows:
I : This function will be active as soon as the block is read.
D This function will be active after all commands in the
block have been executed.
2 To be specified as the first M code when the center through
coolant specification is applied.
(1) M00: Program stop

Automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is
executed. Even when the program is stopped, all modal information
remains unchanged as in single block operation. The automatic
operation can be restarted by pushing the CYCLE START button.
In the status light (option) specifications, a yellow display lamp
illuminates.
(2) M01: Optional stop
Similar to the M00, automatic operation is stopped after a block
which contains M01 is executed. This code is effective only when the
optional stop switch is ON on the operator’s panel. In the status light
(option) specifications, a yellow display lamp illuminates.
(3) M02, M30: End of program
(a) Indicates the end of the main program. Used when the program
is loaded in memory from tape.
(b) Ends automatic operation and resets.
(c) For memory operation, passes program control to the beginning
of the program.
(d) In the status light (option) specifications, the yellow display lamp
blinks.
(e) M30 puts the automatic power turn–off function into effect,
provided that the function is enabled.
(4) M29: Rigid mode
When M29 Sxxxx is commanded previous to tapping/reverse tapping
cycle command, the machine becomes rigid mode. Refer to IV–2.2.6.
(5) M32 to M34, M40 to M46: AI tool monitor
These M functions are related to the AI tool monitor. For details, see
descriptions about the AI tool monitor.
(6) M60 to M65: Automatic opening and closing of the door
This function is provided for the splash guard with an automatic door.
With this function, the door can be opened while a program is being
executed to access the inside of the machine. After the access is
completed, the door can be closed automatically by applying an
external signal to the machine. After the door is closed, program
execution resumes.
This function is useful when a robot or pallet changer is used.
(7) M98: Calling of subprogram
This code is used to enter a subprogram. Refer to “Execution of
subprogram” in the Operator’s Manual of NC for details.
(8) M99: End of subprogram
This code shows the end of a subprogram. Executing M99 takes the
control back to the main program. Refer to “Preparation of
Subprograms” in the Operator’s Manual of NC for details.
136
NOTE
• If there is a block following M00, M01, M02 or M30, it is not
read into the buffer.
• Do not use M codes M00 to M99 for the external M code
BCD output function.
2.2.4 Specify a tool position by using a 2–digit or 3–digit number after T.

Tool Function M 0 6 T VV ( VV : Tool number) or
(T Function) M 0 6 T VVV ( VVV : Tool group number)
A tool thus specified can be randomly specified via the shortest path.
When using the tool life management function, specify a tool group
number in the T code. In addition to the T function, the following
incremental command can be specified:
M 0 6 P n (n : the nth from present tool position with CW)
NOTE
1 When T is not specified in a command such as M06, the
current tool is changed to the tool with the adjacent tool
number on the right.
2 When a tool number other than 01, 02, ..., 14(*) is specified,
alarm 251 (an ATC error) is issued.
3 If a value other than 1, 2, ..., 14(*) is specified in n after P,
the remainder obtained by dividing the value by 14(*) is
assumed. For example, when 58 is specified in n, n is
assumed to be 2.
4 When a tool change command is executed during cutter
compensation, tool length compensation, or a canned
cycle, alarm 251 (an ATC error) is issued. Before executing
the tool change command, be sure to cancel cutter
compensation, tool length compensation, and canned
cycle. (G49 and G80 can be specified in the block that
specifies M06.)
5 When Tool change sequence is being executed, Z axis must
not be moved by manual operation after stopping the Tool
change sequence by single block or pressing the FEED
HOLD button.
6 When the tool change (M06) command is specified, coolant
stops. Therefore, specify the command to turn on the
coolant (M08) in the next block as necessary. (When bit 7
of PMC parameter K0 is set to 0)
* For the T21iCe series, up to 21.
137
2.2.5 a) M19 ;
Spindle Orientation The spindle stops at the position of angle specified in parameter (Note)
Function (M19 by means of this command.
Function)
NOTE
At this time of the shipment the spindle stop position is
adjusted so that the spindle key is parallel with the Y–axis
direction.
b) M19S__;
Angle specification (0_ to 359_)

This command enable the angle (0_ to 359_)
to be specified.
NOTE
1 This command is effective until a spindle rotation command
(M03, M04), spindle stop command (M05), or a command
specifying a miscellaneous function for terminating the
program (such as M00 and M01) is executed. (The reset
key stops spindle excitation but does not cancel a
command.) When a tool change is specified during this
command, alarm 252 (an ATC spindle alarm) is issued.
When a spindle index function command is executed during
rigid tapping, alarm 1007 (M19 not permitted during
tapping) is issued.
2 Do not execute this command during canned cycle. In fine
boring (G76) and back boring (G87), the spindle index is
automatically performed and the table shifts. Table shift
direction is set in parameter No. 5101.
138
2.2.6 (1) General

Rigid Tapping Cycle Tapping cycle (G84) and reverse tapping cycle (G74) are effective in
both of rigid mode and conventional mode. These modes are
(Function M29) switched by M code. Rigid tapping is performed by simultaneously
feeding the spindle and the Z axis without the floating tapper,
therefore, effective for high–speed and high–accuracy tapping.
(2) Command format
G jj X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ Q_ F_ K_ ;
Repeat number
Cutting feedrate
Depth of cut in the peck tapping cycle
Dwell time at the bottom of tapping and

R–point return
Position command at R–point
Position command at the bottom of tapping
Position command of tapping
G74 – Reverse tapping cycle

G84 – Tapping cycle
NOTE
1 The machining start point in a peck tapping cycle and
clearance d in a high–speed peck tapping cycle are
specified in parameter 5114 or 5115.
2 A peck tapping cycle is validated by the Q command in the
tapping cycle. When Q0 is specified, no peck tapping cycle
is executed.
(3) Rigid mode

To specify the rigid mode, M29Sxxxx; is commanded previous to
tapping/reverse tapping cycle command. The spindle is stopped, and
tapping/reverse tapping cycle is the following command becomes
rigid mode.
...
...
M29Sxxxx;
G jj X___ Y___ Z___ R___ P___ Q___ F___ K___ ;
X___ Y___;
X___ Y___; Rigid
... mode
...
G80;
...
...
139
F ___ Sxxxx; Lead of thread

Sxxxx should be less than 5000 (5000 min–1) 6000 (6000 min–1)
(15000 min–1 spindle). When a value greater than it is command, PS
alarm (No. 200) will occur in the GVV block.
F ___ should be less than 15000 (15 m/min). If a value more than
15000 is commanded, the feed rate does not exceed 15000 (15 m/min).
It is impossible to input Sxxxx again before inputting GVV , after
having input Sxxxx once. Do not specify M29 during the canned
cycle in the conventional mode. In any case, a PS alarm (No. 203)
occurs.
When the rigid tapping cycle ends, the spindle stops, that is, S0 is
specified.
After specifying G code (G80, other canned cycle G code, or G code
in group 01), rigid mode will change to former mode.
NOTE
1 GVV indicates the reverse tapping cycle (G74) and tapping
cycle (G84).
2 Be sure to input Sxxxx in the M29 block. Even when the
canned cycle cancel (G80) is entered without executing the
tapping cycles (G74, G84) after the rigid mode is selected
by M29Sxxxx;, the rigid mode is not released.
3 Specify M29Sxxxx independently without fail.
4 Don’t specify M03, M04 and M05 in the block just after G80.
5 Don’t specify M03, M04 and M05 in the block between
M29Sxxxx and G80.
(4) Conventional mode (floating tap)

Command method in conventional mode remains. Refer to the NC’s
OPERATOR’S MANUAL for details.
...
...
M03 (or M04) Sxxxx;
G jj X___ Y___ Z___ R___ P___ Q___ F___ K___ ;
X___ Y___;
X___ Y___;
...
...
G80;
140
(5) G84 (Tapping cycle)

Command method in conventional mode remains. G84 in rigid mode
is shown below.
G84 (G98) G84 (G99)
Spindle stops Spindle

stops
Initial point Initial point
Movement 1
Movement 6
Movement 2 P
Spindle tops Point R
P rotates CW
Spindle tops
Point R Spindle stops
rotates CW
Spindle stops
Movement 3
Movement 5
Spindle tops
Spindle tops
rotates CCW
rotates CCW Spindle stops P
Spindle stops P Point Z
Point Z
Movement 4
Rapid traverse
Synchronous feeding of Z axis and spindle
P Dwell
NOTE
1 Feedrate override during synchronously feeding Z axis and
spindle is assumed 100%. Override of spindle is also
assumed 100%.
2 Single block
When executing tapping cycle in single block, the machine
dwells or stops at terminate points of movement 1, 2 and 6.
3 Feed hold
When specifying feed hold while movement 3 through 5,
FEED HOLD lamp will be lit immediately, but the machine
will not stop immediately and stops after movement 6 will
finish. When specifying feed hold while movement 6 is
executed, the machine will stop immediately.
141
(6) G74 (Reverse tapping cycle)

Command method in conventional mode remains. G74 in rigid mode
is shown below.
G74 (G98) G74 (G99)
Spindle stops
Spindle stops
Initial point
P P
Spindle tops
Spindle tops Point R
Point R rotates CCW
rotates CCW Spindle stops
Spindle stops
Spindle tops Spindle tops
rotates CW rotates CW
Point Z
Point Z Spindle stops
Spindle stops P
P
Rapid traverse
Synchronous feeding of Z axis and spindle
P Dwell
Refer to notes in (5), G84 tapping cycle.
142
2.3 The machine position obtained by the manual operation is inserted in a

program and a program can be created. In other words, after the tool is
PLAYBACK moved by the manual operation (jog or handle feed), the tool can be
moved by the same distance in the automatic operation (playback).
Words other than X, Y, Z (B, C, D, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R,
S, T, EOB) can be registered in the memory by exactly the same operation
as EDIT mode.
The machine position is inserted by the following procedure.
(1) Set “TEACH IN” switch to “ON” on the QUICK screen.
(2) Set the mode switch to EDIT.

(3) Move the machine to the required position by handle or jog. (The
mode must be EDIT.)
(4) Push the + key.
(5) Enter the address X [X] .
(6) Push the key, then the machine position along the X axis
is stored in the memory.
If the current machine position is X10.521 Y30.270 Z–15.0, for
example, X10521 is stored in memory as X–axis coordinate
value, by pushing the key.
Content stored in the program = X10521
Push [ Y ], , [ Z ] and keys, then the machine

position along the Y and Z axis is stored in the memory
respectively.
143
NOTE
1 After entering the address X, Y or Z, enter numerical values
and push key then the values entered in the
machine position are added and registered. This is used to

correct the machine position through key entry.
2 The cordinate value registered in this way is an absolute
coordinate. Enter G90 (Absolute command) at the head of
a program.
3 Insert in the same way as edit operation for program
commands other than machine position.
4 Insert an EOB ( [;] , ), and one block registration

completes.
144
3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS PARAMETERS
3 DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS
145
PARAMETERS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
3.1
DISPLAYING NOTE
PARAMETERS Modes need not be changed when parameters are only
monitored. Modes can be monitored even automatic
operation.
3.1.1 Follow the procedure below to display parameters.

NC Parameter
(1) After pressing the key, press the and the section select
soft key [PARAM] to select the parameter screen.
← Soft key display

(section select)
Backward Soft keys Forward

menu key menu key
(2) The parameter screen consists of multiple pages. Use step (a) or (b)
to display the page that contains the parameter you want to display.
(a) Use the page select key , or the cursor move keys
to display the desired page.
(b) Enter the data number of the parameter you want to display from
the keyboard, then press the [NO.SRH] soft key. The parameter
page containing the specified data number appears with the
cursor positioned at the data number. (The data is displayed in
reverse video.)
NOTE
If key entry is started with the section select soft keys
displayed, they are replaced automatically by operation
select soft keys including [NO.SRH]. Pressing the [(OPRT)]
soft key can also cause the operation select keys to be
displayed.
146
← Data entered from the

keyboard
← Soft key display
(section select)
Cursor
147
3.1.2
PMC Parameter
(1) After pressing and in the stated sequence, clicking the
chapter selection soft key [PMC] selects the PMCPRM.
(2) Clicking the [PARAMETER] and [KEEPRL] softkeys in the stated
sequence displays the “PMC PRM(KEEP RELAY)”.
148
3.2
CHANGING NOTE
PARAMETERS Parameters can be changed only in the MDI mode when the
machine is stopped or in the emergency stop state.
Some parameter settings, for example, those for machine
operation, can be changed. After changing parameters, the
machine may not operate, or something dangerous may
occur depending on the situation. Therefore, parameters
are usually not changeable (i.e., write–protected).
Before changing the data of a parameter, be sure to check
the number of the desired parameter and the data to be set.
Following is the procedure for changing NC parameters.

(1) Enter the MDI mode, or bring the machine to an emergency stop.
(2) Enable parameter writing.
(2)–1 To display the setting screen, press the + key,
then the [SETTING] section select soft key.

The first page of the setting screen appears.
After pressing and in the stated sequence, click
the chapter selection soft key [SETTING].

(2)–2 Position the cursor on “PARAMETER WRITE” using the
cursor move keys.
(2)–3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft
keys.)
149
Data entered from the

keyboard
Soft key display (opera-

tion select)
(2)–4 To set “PARAMETER WRITE=” to 1, press the [ON:1] soft

key, or alternatively enter 1 and press the [INPUT] soft key.
From now on, the parameters can be set. At the same time an
alarm condition (P/S 100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE)
occurs in the NC.
(3) To display the parameter screen, press the + key, then

the [PARAM] section select soft key.
(4) Display the page containing the parameter you want to set, and
position the cursor on the parameter.
(5) Enter data, then press the [INPUT] soft key. The parameter indicated
by the cursor is set to the entered data.
Example: 12000 [INPUT]
Cursor
Data can be entered continuously for parameters, starting at the

selected parameter, by separating each data item with a semicolon (;).
Example:
Entering 10;20;30;40 and pressing the [INPUT] key assigns values
10, 20, 30 and 40 to parameters in order starting at the parameter
indicated by the cursor.
(6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) as required.
150
(7) If parameter setting is complete, set “PARAMETER WRITE=” to 0

on the setting screen to disable further parameter setting.
(8) Reset the NC to release the alarm condition (P/S 100).
If an alarm condition (000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) occurs
in the NC, turn it off before continuing operation.
The program protection key can be used to enable or

disable parameter entry.
Set bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3297 to 1.
If the program protection key is set to “ON”: Parameters
cannot be changed.
If the program protection key is set to “RELEASE”:
Parameters can be changed.
If this function is used, it is impossible to enable
“PARAMETER WRITE” on the “SETTING”.
151
3.3 For example, let’s set the compensation amount with compensation No.
001.
CHANGING OFFSET Suppose that the setting is –100.0.
DATA
Soft key [OFFSET]
OFFSET screen appears.
Move the cursor to the target number for setting.

Here, place the cursor at 001.
152
Enter the following values:
153
3.4 For example, let’s set an offset value of the workpiece reference position
in the G54 system.
CHANGING
Assume that the X value is 250.0 and the Y value is –190.0.
WORKPIECE
COORDINATE
SYSTEM DATA
Soft key [WORK]
The WORK OFSET

(workpiece offset)
screen is displayed.
Move the cursor to the number to be set.

In this example, move the cursor to Y in
No. 1 (offset value of the workpiece reference
position in the G54 system).
No. 01
154
Enter the following values:
155
3.5
CUSTOM MACRO
VARIABLES
3.5.1 As shown in the table below, custom macro variables are classified into
Custom Macro common variables and system variables according to their variable
numbers.
Variables
Types of variables
Variable name Variable No. Description Remarks
Local variables #1 to #33 Variables used in a macro locally Write are enabled.
(can be used by user)
Common variables #100 to #149 Data cleared when power is turned off
(can be used by user) #500 to #531 Data retained when power is turned off
Additional common #100 to #199 Data cleared when power is turned off
variables #500 to #999 Data retained when power is turned off
#1000 to #1015, Interface input signal (DI) Write are enabled.

#1032
#1100 to #1115, Interface output signal (DO)

#1132, #1133
#2000 to #2200 Tool offset value Write are enabled.
#3000 Macro alarm
#3001, #3002 Clock
#3003, #3004 Automatic operation control
#3005 Setting
#3011, #3012 Clock information

System variables #3901, #3902 Number of machined parts, number of Write are enabled.
(fixed uses) required parts
System variables
#4001 to #4120 Modal information
(fixed uses)
#5001, #5004 Block end position
#5021, #5024 Machine coordinates
#5041 to #5044 Workpiece coordinates
#5061 to #5064 Skip signal position
#5081 to #5083 Tool offset value
#5101, #5104 Servo deviation
#2500 to #2506
or #5201,
#5221, #5241, Workpiece offset (X-axis)
#5261, #5281,
#5301, #5321
156
Variable name Variable No. Description Remarks
#2600 to #2606
or #5202,
#5222, #5242, Workpiece offset (Y-axis)
#5262, #5282,
#5302, #5322
#2700 to #2706
or #5203,
System variables
#5223, #5243, Workpiece offset (Z-axis)
(fixed uses)
#5263, #5283,
#5303, #5323
#2800 to #2806
or #5204,
#5224, #5244, Workpiece offset (fourth axis)
#5264, #5284,
#5304, #5324
This section explains how to display and set common variables on the
screen. For details on programs that use custom macro variables and
system variables, refer to “Custom macro” in the CNC Operator’s
Manual.
3.5.2
Setting and Displaying (1) Displaying common variables
Common Variables
(a) Press the key + . Press the ["] soft key then the
[MACRO] soft key to select the macro variable screen.
(b) Enter variable number, then press the [NO. SRH] key.
(2) Setting common variables

* Turn off the program protect key.
(a) Move the cursor to the common variable to be set.
(b) Use the numeric keys to enter data for the common variable, then
press the key.
* To set <empty>, just press the [INPUT] soft key without data.
157
4. MANUAL RUNNING
[CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
4 MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]
To operate the ROBODRILL manually, first select the manual operation

mode key on the operator’s panel, then the appropriate function keys
(such as spindle, automatic door, and axis movement).
158
4. MANUAL RUNNING
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS [CNC OPERATION]
4.1 Set the S command with MDI. A combination of and

MANUAL
OPERATION OF THE rotates the spindle.
SPINDLE The spindle speed can be adjusted using and .
159
4. MANUAL RUNNING
4.2 The door is automatically opened or closed by and . It is

AUTOMATIC DOOR
opened or closed each time is pressed.
160
4. MANUAL RUNNING
4.3 (1) First select the manual operation mode using .

AXIS MOVEMENT
(2) Select the target axis using .
(3) Select the feedrate using .
(4) Rotate the handle to drive the tool along the axis.
Feedrate selection Metric Inches
200 0.2 mm 0.02 inch
100 0.1 mm 0.01 inch
10 0.01 mm 0.001 inch
1 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch
161
5 AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]
Automatic running means to run the machine tool according to a program.
162
5.1
MDI RUNNING
5.1.1 A program of one block can be entered to run the machine in the MDI
mode.
MDI Running
NOTE
A program for MDI running can be edited irrespective of the
program protect key status.
Examples 1 To move the axis
Select the MDI mode.
+ Select the program screen.
The program (MDI) window appears.
Enter data for each address. For the first key

[G] [X] input, address data switches to “address”. For the
second and subsequent key inputs, address data
switches to “numeric”.
[;]
Letters are entered using soft keys. See Section
I–4.2.)
163
Press the CYCLE START button.
164
Examples 2 To turn the spindle

M03S500
Press the PRGRM button.

+ The program (MDI) window appears.
[M] [S] [;]
165
Examples 3 To replace the tool

M06T3
Press the PRGRM button.

+ The program (MDI) window appears.
[M] [T] [;]
166
5.2 Memory running means to run the machine tool according to a program
stored in memory.
MEMORY RUNNING
(MEM)
5.2.1
Settings for Memory 1. Machining program check
Running Whether the part program coded by the programmer is correct must
be checked. Whether jig settings and offset are correct must also be
checked.
This machine tool provides various operation support functions that
can perform these checks efficiently and safely. An example of
effectively checking the machining program is given here. These
support functions are validated for the command to be executed
immediately after each function button is turned on and for the
subsequent commands.
Machine lock (1) When the machine lock is on, each axis of the
machine tool does not move.
(2) This button is used to check whether the M/S
function and command formats, such as G
code and axis address are correct.
(3) ON/OFF switching operates on the quick
screen. 31: SEQ. SELECTION
Z axis lock (1) This key is used to check the relative move-
ment of the spindle and table with the Z axis
movement fixed.
(2) ON/OFF switching operates on the quick
screen. 31: SEQ. SELECTION
Single block key (1) Stops the machine each time one block of a
program is executed. The operator can check
a program by executing it on a block–by–block
basis and pressing the cycle start button.
Dry run (1) When dry run is on, the F function (that is, fee-
drate) specified by the program is ignored and
the machine tool is set to the jog feed speed.
(2) Before pressing this key, check that no me-
chanical interference occurs during running.
Rapid traverse (1) The feedrate specified by the move command

override for the machine tool can be reduced according
to the percentage which corresponds to a key
by pressing one of the rapid traverse override
keys: TRVRS LOW, TRVRS 25%, TRVRS
100%
NOTE
1 For these operation support functions, be sure to read
Section III–9 “Trial Run” once to assure safe operation.
2 Even if the machine lock or the Z axis lock is on, the spindle
turns and coolant ON/OFF is executed. The tool change
command is not executed.
167
2. Actual machining
Be sure to turn off the following function keys when doing the actual
machining.
Machine lock button When machine lock has been turned on and a
program containing axis move commands has
been suspended, the power must be turned off
then back on.
Z axis lock button When Z–axis lock has been turned on and a pro-
gram containing axis move commands has been
suspended, the power must be turned off then
back on.
Dry run button When machining is started with the dry run on,
feedrate is not appropriate, causing danger.
5.2.2 1. Starting memory running

Memory Running
Operation (1) Press the mode selection key.
(2) Press the + function key to display the

PROGRAM screen and enter the number (O–****) of the program
to run. Then use the cursor key to check that the part
program has been searched.
(3) Press the mode selection key.
(4) When the CYCLE START button is pressed, memory

running starts and the CYCLE START lamp lights.
(5) The PROGRAM CHECK screen can also be displayed in step
(1).
NOTE
The CYCLE START button is ignored in the following cases:
(a) When the FEED HOLD button is being pressed
(b) When the EMERGENCY STOP button is being
pressed
(c) When the RESET key is being pressed
(d) When the mode is invalid
(e) When a sequence number is being searched
(f) When an alarm is on
(g) When automatic running is in progress
(h) When the NC is not ready
(i) When the external workpiece number search signal
and the external program number search signal are
on
168
2. Stopping memory running

(1) Press the FEED HOLD button.
When the FEED HOLD button is pressed, the FEED HOLD

LED lights and the CYCLE START LED goes off.
(i) When the axis is moving, the feed stops after deceleration.
(ii) When it is being executed, the dwell is halted.
(iii) Automatic running stops after M jj and S jj operations
are executed.
(1) When the SPINDLE STOP button is pressed, all
operations stop.
(2) When an M00 code is entered, the block that includes the
M00 code is executed, then the operation automatically
stops.
(3) When an M01 code is entered with the M01 STOP button
on, the operation automatically stops and the FEED
HOLD LED lights.
169
5.3 Machine running by a program stored in external memory is enabled by

connecting FANUC input/output units or a host computer to the
REMOTE RUNNING reader/punch interface of this machine tool.
(REMOT) This section explains how to connect the “Handy File” FANUC I/O unit
for remote operation of the machine, as an example.
NOTE
If a product other than FANUC products is connected to the
reader/punch interface as an input/output unit, a problem
may occur that the control unit of this machine tool cannot
start operation of the product.
The following explanation is applicable only to remote
running enabled when FANUC input/output units are
connected to the reader/punch interface.
5.3.1 To enable remote running, connect the communication cables of the

Settings for Remote input/output units to the reader/punch interface and set the parameters
related to the interface. CNC Parameters Manual.
Running
5.3.2 1. Starting remote running

Remote Running (1) Connect the input/output device to the reader/punch interface
of the machine operator’s panel.
Operation
(2) Check the program format (ISO/EIA) of the input/output
device.
(3) Check the settings of the parameters related to the
reader/punch interface, and other settings.
(4) Set REMOTE MODE to ON on the QUICK screen.
(5) Cause the program screen to appear.
(6) Select the mode selection key .
170
(7) Press the soft key [ " ], and the soft key [SL. SDL] appears
provided that the I/O devices are connected correctly.
(8) Press the soft key [FL. SDL], and the “FILE
DIRECTORY”screen appears.
(9) Press the soft key [SELECT], and the message “SELECT
FILE NUMBER =” appears at the lower left section of the
screen.
(10)Enter the target file number and press .
(11)Press the soft key [EXEC], and the message “CURRENT

SELECTED: ****” appears at the top of the screen.
(12)Press the CYCLE START button , and the remote

operation starts and the corresponding lamp lights.
2. Stopping remote running
Remote running is stopped in the same way memory running is
stopped For details, see the next page.
3. When remote running is interrupted by MDI running or manual
running
Remote running can be interrupted by MDI running and manual
running. See Section 5.2.2 in IV, “Settings and Operations of
Automatic Running.”
4. Automatic running using a program in memory cannot be executed
with REMOTE ON on the QUICK screen.
Turn REMOTE to OFF if the remote operation is not to be done
further.
171
5.4
SETTINGS AND
OPERATIONS OF
AUTOMATIC
RUNNING
5.4.1 Single block is the function that executes one block of the program each
time the CYCLE START button is pressed.
Single Block (SINGL
BLOCK) (1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key to set the single block.
One block of the program is executed and the machine tool stops.
When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the next block is
executed and the machine tool stops.
To release the single block mode press the SINGL BLOCK key
again.
NOTE
1 For G28 and G29, after the single block is executed, the
machine tool stops even during machining.
2 The single block stop point in a canned cycle is any of the
end point 1, 2, or 6 in the figure shown below.
1
2 6
3 5
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
4
3 For a tool change sequence, the machine tool stops at the

specified point and the FEED HOLD lamp lights.
172
5.4.2 (1) Return to the feed hold mode.

Restarting Automatic (2) Press the CYCLE START button.
Running After Feed
Hold or Stop
The FEED HOLD lamp goes off when it is lit.
5.4.3 (1) Press the FEED HOLD button or the SINGL BLOCK button during
automatic running to stop or halt the machine tool.
Manual Running
Execution During
Automatic Running
or
(2) Look at the position indicator and record the coordinates of the stop
position.
(3) Execute manual running (see 4. in IV).
(4) Return the axis to the recorded coordinates (start point of manual
running) while looking at the position indicator.
(5) To restart automatic running, switch the mode to the original mode.
(6) Press the CYCLE START button.
5.4.4 (1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key. The machine tool stops after one
block of the program has been executed.
MDI Command
(2) Set the MDI mode.
Execution During
Automatic Running
(3) Operate the MDI (see Section 5.1 in IV).

(4) To restart automatic running, press the MEM mode selection button
and then the CYCLE START button.
173
NOTE
1 Old modal data remains. If new modal data is needed, it
must be registered. (Example: G code, travel during a
canned cycle)
2 The modal data specified from the MDI after MDI operation
affects the subsequent automatic running.
3 The MDI cannot be used to specify cutter compensation.
4 The MDI command cannot be executed when automatic
running is being stopped by the feed hold.
5.4.5 The F–function can be used to override feedrate for each 10% step
between 0% and 200%.
Feedrate Override Dial
(FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE)
5.4.6 When the block that includes M01 is encountered, the instruction of that
block is executed. After the block has been executed, the axes and spindle
M01 Stop (OPT STOP)
stop, and the coolant power supply is turned off, and the FEED HOLD
LED lights. To validate M01, the M01 STOP key must be on.
To restart the operation, press the CYCLE START button.
This LED lights when an

optional stop occurs.)
When M00 is executed, the FEED HOLD LED lights (optional stop
status) regardless of whether the M01 STOP key is on or off.
174
5.4.7 This function is intended to skip program blocks that contain a slash (/).
Optional Block Skip It is enabled/disabled by setting OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP on the
QUICK SCREEN 31:SEQ.SELECTION to ON/OFF.
NOTE
1 The information of the block skipped by this function cannot
be stored in the buffer register. When one block is skipped
entirely, the next block is stored in the buffer register.
2 A slash must be placed at the beginning of the block to be
skipped. If the block to be skipped does not begin with the
slash, the portion between the slash and EOB is ignored.
5.4.8
Rapid Traverse Rate
Override (TRVRS LOW,
TRVRS 25%, TRVRS
100%)
The rapid traverse rate override can be set to 100%, 25%, or LOW. If an
override of 25% is applied when the rapid traverse rate is 48 m/min, the
rapid traverse rate becomes about 12 m/min. When the rapid traverse
override is set to LOW, the rapid traverse rate is 400 mm/minute. This
override is applicable to the following rapid traverses:
(1) Rapid traverse by G00
(2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle
(3) Rapid traverse at G27, G28, or G29
(4) Manual rapid traverse
(5) Rapid traverse for manual return to the reference position
(6) Rapid traverse in tool change sequence
175
6. TOOL CHANGE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
6 TOOL CHANGE
176
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 6. TOOL CHANGE
6.1 (1) Never try to install the tool directly on the spindle since it is
dangerous. Be sure to install it on the tool cartridge.
TOOL CHANGE (2) Never try to use tool arbors other than those specified. (See Item I.3,
PRECAUTIONS “TOOLS” for the tool arbors that can be used.)
(3) When installing the tool to the tool cartridge, be sure to insert it in all
the way to the end until the grip key is fully engaged in the keyway
of the tool. Upon completion of the tool installation, confirm that the
tool has been firmly secured without any play.
Tooling
Grip
(4) Never try to install the tool on the tool cartridge which is located
below the spindle.)
(5) During changing of tools, the single block mode is disabled. If tools
are changed when the single block mode is set (for example, pressing
the “TOOL CHANGE” key in the MDI mode), the machine cannot
be stopped until the tool change operation is completed.
(6) When the operation is stopped by pressing the “FEED HOLD”
button, never try to move the Z–axis in the manual running mode.
The unit will lose track of the coordinate and failure will occur.
177
6.2 When specifying the tool change using the program or MDI, the following
command needs to be given using the M06 code:
COMMANDS WITH M
CODES After T, specify the tool to be indexed using a two digit number.
M06 T VV ( VV : Tool No.) or
M06 T VVV ( VVV : Tool group number)
With this command, the tool having the specified number is
selected in the shorter path.)
In addition to the above, the following command may be used:
M06 Pn (n: The n–th tool from the current tool in the
clockwise direction)
The tool cartridge always rotates clockwise.)
NOTE
1 PS alarm (ATC alarm) is displayed when a tool number other
than 01 to 14(*) are specified.
2 When a tool number other than 1 to 14(*) are specified for
the “n” following P, the number minus multiple of 14(*) will be
effective. For example, “n” will be 2 when n = 58 is specified.
3 Alarm 252 (ATC alarm) will be displayed when the tool
change command is executed during the cutter
compensation, tool length compensation, or canned cycle.
To execute the tool change command, be sure to cancel the
cutter compensation, tool length compensation, or canned
cycle. (Commands G49 and G80 may be specified within
the block for M06.)
4 When X and Y axes movement and a tool change are
commanded within the same block
(Example) G00 X500.0 M06 T02
In this case, the tool change operation is executed first.
Then, at the same time the Z axis moves to the top, the
turret begins to rotate, and the X (Y) axis begins to move.
If the X (Y) axis is still moving even after the turret rotation
is completed, the tool change operation is temporarily
interrupted until the movement of the X (Y) axis is
completed.
Upon completion of the X (Y) axis movement, the tool
change operation resumes.
5 If a specified tool has the same tool number as the currently
selected tool, spindle orientation and return to the Z–axis
reference position are performed, but tool change is not.
* For the T21iCe series, up to 21.
178
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 6. TOOL CHANGE
6.3 A tool change can be executed by pressing the tool change button in the
MDI mode.
“TOOL CHANGE”
When TOOL CHANGE key is pressed, the tool cartridge rotates
KEY clockwise to select the tool next to the current one.
179
6.4 The ROBODRILL series has a function for checking whether an arbor is
mounted on the spindle.
MEASURES WHEN
This function is designed to stop the machine for safety in an emergency
AN ERROR OCCURS situation, for example, when the pull stud of the arbor is broken during
DURING TOOL machining.
CHANGE If the reset button is pressed while the tools are being changed, tool change
stops, and an alarm is issued. The following table lists how to recover
from an incorrect tool change operation.
Description Action
An incorrect When a tool is already Correct the program.

tool number assigned to the specified tool
was number.
specified.
When no tool is assigned to Correct the program.
the specified tool number.
The specified tool number has no tool

assigned to it.
The tool was changed with the tool of a Perform automatic recovery.
unspecified tool number.
The opera- When the machine was Perform automatic recovery.

tor stopped stopped with the EMER-
the machine GENCY STOP button or
while the <RESET> key.
tool was
being When the machine was Restart the machine.
changed. stopped with the STOP button.
When the machine was Close the door, then restart

stopped by opening the door. the machine.
The ROBODRILL is provided with an automatic tool change recovery

program (described later) so a tool change alarm can be released easily.
Most tool change alarms can be released using this program.
For detailed information, see Section V–4.
180
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 7. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS
7 SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS
181
7. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
7.1 The rotating direction of the spindle is defined when viewing the tip of
the spindle from the spindle motor side.
ROTATION OF THE
Spindle rotation key is lit depending on the direction of the spindle
SPINDLE rotation.
The spindle speed can be specified for each rotation using the address S
and a number from two to four (five) digits. The unit of the number is
min–1.
Rotation of the spindle can be controlled by either of the following two
methods:
7.1.1 In the AUTO or MDI mode, the spindle rotation can be controlled by the
Method Using the following M codes:
M Code M03: Rotates the spindle clockwise.
M04: Rotates the spindle counterclockwise.
M05: Stops the spindle motion after completing all the commands
within a given block.
Examples N01 M03 S1500: Rotates the spindle clockwise at the speed of
1,500 min–1.
N02 S4000: Sets the spindle speed to 4,000 min–1.
N03 M04: Rotates the spindle counterclockwise.
N04 M05: Stops the spindle.
7.1.2 (1) Specify the spindle speed in the MDI mode.

Method Using the (2) Select one of the MANUAL modes.
Spindle Key (Manual) (3) When the spindle operation key is pressed, the LED goes on, and the
on the Operator’s spindle rotates. (The spindle rotates in the same direction as the
direction in which the spindle rotated previously. When the spindle
Panel rotates for the first time after power–on, it rotates clockwise.)
(4) When the spindle operation key is pressed again, the LED goes off,
and spindle rotation stops.
NOTE
1 The spindle rotation can be stopped in any mode.
Pressing this button during automatic operation stops the
machine by effecting feed hold.
2 The lamp blinks during the rigid tapping mode.
3 If a spindle speed is not specified, pressing the key cannot
cause the spindle to rotate. (When the safety door is closed)
182
7.1.3 Even if the safety door is open, pressing the SPINDLE key causes the
Spindle Rotation When spindle to rotate under the following conditions.
the Safety Door is D The spindle rotates at a specified constant speed (with S commands
ignored).
Open The rotation speed is specified at FUNCTIONS on the QUICK
screen 31 : SEQ. SELECTION.
D Spindle overriding is ignored.
183
7.2 The spindle speed may be overridden in all the running modes.
SPINDLE OVERRIDE Pressing the SPINDLE OVERRIDE [DOWN] or [UP] key can specify an
override speed from 30% to 200% in 10% units to control the spindle
speed. When 100% key is pressed, the spindle speed becomes that of S
command.
Examples With 80% override at S3000

3,000 80/100 = 2,400
(The spindle speed is 2,400 min–1.)
When the overridden spindle speed exceeds the spindle’s maximum
speed, the spindle rotates at its maximum speed.
Examples When an override of 120% is set at S7500 with a maximum spindle speed
of 8,000 min–1, the spindle speed is 8,000 min–1 rather than
7,500 120/100 = 9,000 min–1. (In case of standard specification.)
NOTE
The override setting for the spindle is not valid in the tapping
cycle (G74 and G84).
184
7.3 The load meter is displayed on the spindle monitor screen. Select this
screen according to the following procedure.
SPINDLE LOAD
METER 1) Press the + key to cause the system screen to appear.
2) Press the soft key [ å ] to turn over the soft key pages.
3) Press the soft key [SP. parameter].
4) Press the soft key [SP. monitor].
50 100 150 200

Load meter reading (%)
The α–T14/21iCe standard spindle controls the spindle motor in a unique

way. The continuous rating varies with the speed.
Set the load meter according to the list below.
1500 or 2800 or
Speed (min–1) 1750 2000 2250 2500
less greater
Continuous rating
53 62 71 80 89 100
(%)
10-minute rating
148
(%), 25%ED
* 25%ED means that the motor is turned on for 2.5 minutes and off for
7.5 minutes on a cycle time of 10 minutes.
185
7.4 Spindle orientation means to stop the spindle at a position specified with
a parameter. This is done using the M19 command.
SPINDLE
The machine is factory–set so that the spindle stops with the spindle key
ORIENTATION (M19) parallel to the Y–axis. Do not change this angle. (Changing this angle
disables automatic tool change recovery operation.)
NOTE
1 This command remains effective until the spindle rotation
command (M00 or M01), spindle stop command (M05), or
program end auxiliary function (M00 or M01) is issued.
2 Issuing this command during rigid tapping generates an EX
alarm (No. 1007). (M19 cannot be specified during tapping)
3 Do not issue this command during a canned cycle. Fine
boring (G76) and back boring (G87) cause automatic
spindle orientation.
186
7.5
SPINDLE MOTOR
CHARACTERISTIC
Output characteristics Torque characteristics

6 10 min. rating (40% ED) 40
5.5 10 min. rating
5 39.4
Torque Nm
30
Output kW
4 Continuous rating
3.7
3 20
Continuous rating
2 12.5
10
1
0 0
0 1500 2000 2800 4000 6000 8000 0 1500 2000 2800 4000 6000 8000
Spindle speed (min–1) Spindle speed (min–1)
Note) The graphs shown above are obtained when the efficiency is 1.
Fig.7.5 (a) Spindle Motor Diagram (standard)
Output characteristics Torque characteristics
30
4 10 min. rating (40%ED)
3.7 25
10 min. rating (40%ED)
23.5
3 20
2 15
Continuous rating
1.5 10 Continuous rating
1
5
4.8
0
0
0 1500 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000 0 1500 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000
Spindle speed (min–1) Spindle speed (min–1)
Note) The graphs shown above are obtained when the efficiency is 1.
Fig.7.5 (b) Spindle Motor Diagram (15000min–1)
187
8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR,
AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC
8 MESSAGES
188
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
8.1
CNC SCREEN
8.1.1 If an alarm occurs, [ALARM MESSAGE] is automatically displayed.

Alarm Message (When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0)
NOTE
1 If an alarm occurs during edit operation using background
editing, the alarm is displayed on PROGRAM without
screen switching.
While you are using background editing, do not press the
RESET key. Otherwise, automatic machine operation
would stop.
To release an alarm which occurs during background
editing, press any key.
189
[Displaying ALARM MESSAGE]
(1) Press the key, then the or key.
(2) Press soft key [ALARM].
8.1.2 When an operator message is issued, [OPERATOR MESSAGE] is

automatically displayed.
Operator Message
(When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0)
[Displaying OPERATOR MESSAGE]
(1) Press the key, then the or key.
(2) Press soft key [MSG].
190
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
8.2
QUICK SCREEN
8.2.1 When an alarm or operator message is issued, it is displayed at the top of

Common to Screens the screen.
(When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0)
One message is displayed at a time.
An alarm message is displayed in red and an operator message is
displayed in magenta.
8.2.2 On [33:DIAGNOSE/ALARM], you can check the displayed alarm,

Diagnose/Alarm operator, and diagnostic messages. (See the figure above.)
[ALARM] Window displays all alarms being displayed.
Screen (The [ALARM P.PAGE] and [ALARM N.PAGE] soft keys can be used.)
[DIAGNOSTIC] Window displays all operator and diagnostic messages
being displayed.
(The [DGN P.PAGE] and [DGN N.PAGE] soft keys can be used.)
Diagnostic messages are numbered 0 to 999. Operator messages are
numbered starting with 2000.
191
8.3 Pressing the key on the operator’s panel displays [MESSAGE]

COMMON TO CNC
SCREEN AND QUICK Window in the center of the screen.
SCREEN
Pressing the key again closes [MESSAGE] WINDOW.
For details of each message, see the alarm list and operator
and diagnostic message list in Appendix.
When a particular window (such as the OUTPUT NC

STATEMENTS window) of the manual guide screen is
displayed, close it. Such a window cannot be displayed
simultaneously.
192
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 9. RELEASING OVERTRAVEL
9 RELEASING OVERTRAVEL
The term overtravel refers to a fact that the tool goes beyond a range
specified for each axis. If an overtravel occurs, an alarm is generated. To
reset the overtravel, it is necessary to return the tool to within a specified
range.
Overtravel
An alarm from No. 500 to 507 is displayed on the screen.
Examples “500: Overtravel +X”

How to release
An overtravel is released according to the following procedure.
1 Put the machine in the manual operation mode.
2 The axes on which an overtravel occurred are displayed on the screen.
Select one using the axis selection key.
3 Rotate the manual pulse generator in the direction opposite to the
direction indicated on the screen to place the tool within a range of
stroke.
4 Pressing the <RESET> key clears the alarm indication and reset the
alarm.
193
10. RELEASING THE TOOL
TRAPPING STATE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
10 RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE
If the cutter bites into the workpiece and the machine stops, follow the
procedure below to release the state.
(1) Press Reset key on the operator’s panel to release the alarm.
(2) Press Manual operation mode key .
(3) Press Z axis key .
(4) Turn the manual pulse generator clockwise and pull out the cutter
from the workpiece.
NOTE
1 When a T–slot cutter is trapped, it cannot be pull out
upward. Remove the cutter from the arm bar.
2 When a tap is trapped, the rigid tapping return function is
available. See Subsection IV 1.3.10.
194
11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES
INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL
11 DEVICES
195
EXTERNAL DEVICES DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
11.1 To use an external device other than the Handy File for input/output using
the RS–232C interface, change parameters to suit the device.
OVERVIEW
(For normal input/output using the Handy File, the factory–set defaults
need not be changed.)
(1) Ordinary input/output
To use an ordinary input/output unit, change the following
parameters according to the device you are going to use.
No. 0100: Output format
No. 0101: Stop bit, etc.
No. 0102: Input/output unit specification number
No. 0103: Baud rate
Make sure that parameter No. 0020 (I/O channel) is set to “0”.
(2) Memory card
Set “4” to No. 0020 (I/O channel)
(3) Remote buffer (option)
To use a remote buffer, set parameter No. 0020 (I/O channel) to “3”.
Change the following parameters according to the device you are
going to use.
No. 0100: Output format
No. 0131: Stop bit, etc.
No. 0132: Input/output unit specification number
No. 0133: Baud rate
No. 0134: Protocol selection
No. 0135: RS–422/RS–232–C selection, etc.
(4) When the data server (option) is used
Set No. 0020 (I/O channel) to 5.
NOTE
1 Remote buffer connection
Connect the remote buffer to the D–SUB 25 connector in the
cabinet (when RS–232C is being used). When using
RS–422, remove the JD28A connector from the FS16i
option board in the rear of the display device and connect
it to JD6A.
2 To use a remote buffer, the customers should prepare
cables to connect it to external equipment by themselves.
The RS–232–C connector on the machine operator’s panel
may be used for this purpose. In this case, remove
connector JD36A from the FS16i main PC board in the back
side of display and connect it to JD5C on the optional board.
3 For detailed descriptions about the remote buffer, refer to
the Descriptions: Additional Information on the FANUC
Series 15i/150i–MODEL A (Supplement for Remote Buffer)
from this manual.
4 For details of the data server, refer to “FAST Ethernet Board
FAST/DATA SERVER OPERATOR’S MANUAL”.
196
11.2 ROBODRILL has three channels of input/output device interfaces as the

reader/puncher interface. The input/output device to be used is specified
DETAILS OF THE by setting the channel connected to that device in setting parameter I/O
RELATED CHANNEL.
PARAMETERS The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an
input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in
parameters for that channel in advance.
For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output
device data are provided.
The following shows the interrelation between the input/output device
interface parameters for the channels.
– Channel 2 cannot be used.

– Channel 3 (remote buffer) is optional.
– Channel 5 (data server) is optional.
Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)
0101 Stop bit and other data
0020 I/O I/O CHANNEL=0 0102 Number specified for the input/output device
CHANNEL (channel 1)
0103 Baud rate
Specify a channel for an
input/output device. 0111 Stop bit and other data
I/O CHANNEL=1 0112 Number specified for the input/output device

I/O CHANNEL
(channel 1)
=0: Channel 1
0113 Baud rate
=1: Channel 1
=2: Channel 2 (Not used) 0121 Stop bit and other data
=3: Channel 3
I/O CHANNEL=2 0122 Number specified for the input/output device
=4: Memory card
(channel 2)
=5: Data server
0123 Baud rate
0131 Stop bit and other data
0132 Number specified for the input/output device
I/O CHANNEL=3 0133 Baud rate

(channel 3)
0134 Selection of protocol
0135 Selection of RS-422 or RS-232C, and other data
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device
Setting entry is acceptable.

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 5
[I/O CHANNEL] An input/output device used is selected.
0 : The device on channel 1 is selected. (Input/output device connected
to JD36A on the mother board)
197

to JD36A on the mother board)
to JD36B on the mother board)
to the serial communication board)
4 : Memory card
5 : Data server
NOTE
1 The input/output device used can be selected also on the
setting screen. Using the setting screen is a more common
method for selecting the device.
2 The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of
stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific
channel must be set in parameters for that channel in
advance.
I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer to
channel 1. For each, parameters to set the baud rate, the
number of stop bits, and other data are provided separately.
3 JD36A, JD36B, JD28A, and JD6A are numbers of
connectors on the printed circuit boards.
Series 16
MAIN CPU BOARD OPTION-1 BOARD
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3

JD36A JD36B JD28A JD6A
RS232C RS232C RS232C RS422
Reader/ Reader/ Host Host

puncher puncher computer computer
I/O CHANNEL=0 I/O CHANNEL=2 I/O CHANNEL=3 I/O CHANNEL=3

or
I/O CHANNEL=1
198
(1) Parameters common to all channels
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 ENS NCR CTV
Setting entry is acceptable.

[Data type] Bit
[CTV] Character counting for TV check on controlling (in the comment section).
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
[NCR] Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code
0 : LF, CR, CR are output.
1 : Only LF is output.
[ENS] Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code
0 : The NULL code is ignored.
1 : An alarm is generated.
(2) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
[Data type] Bit

[SB2] The number of stop bits
0: 1
1: 2
[ASI] Code used at data input
0 : EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished)
1 : ASCII code
[NFD] Feed before and after the data at data output
0 : Output
1 : Not output
NOTE
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are
used, set NFD to 1.
0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Data type] Bit

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table 11.2 (a).
199
Table 11.2 (a) Set Value and Input/Output Device
Set value Input/output device
0 RS-232-C (Set the parameters to 0 other than those listed below.)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adapter

FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H, FANUC Handy File
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
0103 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Data type] Byte

Set the specification number of the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 0, with a set value in Table 11.2 (b).
Table 11.2 (b) Baud Rate Settings
Set value Baud rate Set value Baud rate
1 50 7 600
2 100 8 1200
3 110 9 2400
4 150 10 4800
5 200 11 9600
6 300 12 19200
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0111 NFD ASI SB2
[Data type] Bit

These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meanings
of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
[Data type] Bit

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table 11.2 (a).
200
0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
[Data type] Bit

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL
is set to 1, with a value in Table 11.2 (b).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0121 NFD ASI SB2
[Data type] Bit

[Data type] Bit

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 11.2 (a).
[Data type] Bit

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL
is set to 2, with a value in Table 11.2 (b).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0131 NFD ASI SB2
[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 3, with a number in Table 11.2 (a).
[Data type] Bit

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL
is set to 3 according to the Table 11.2 (c).
201
NOTE
Valid data range: 1 to 15 (up to a baud rate of 86400 bps)
for the RS–422 interface or 1 to 12 (up to a baud rate of
19200 bps) for the RS–232–C interface.
Table 11.2 (c) Baud Rate Settings

Set value Baud rate Set value Baud rate
1 50 9 2400
2 100 10 4800
3 110 11 9600
4 150 12 19200
5 200 13 38400
6 300 14 76800
7 600 15 86400
8 1200 — —
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0134 CLK NCD SYN PRY
[Data type] Bit

[PRY] Parity bit
0 : Not used
1 : Used
[SYN] NC reset/alarm in protocol B
0: Not reported to the host
1: Reported to the host with SYN and NAK codes
[NCD] CD (signal quality detection) of the RS–232–C interface
0 : Checked
1 : Not checked
[CLK] Baud rate clock when the RS–422 interface is used
0 : Internal clock
1 : External clock
202
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0135 RMS R42 PRA ETX ASC
[Data type] Bit

[ASC] Communication code except NC data
0 : ISO code
1 : ASCII code
[ETX] End code for protocol A or extended protocol A
0 : CR code in ASCII/ISO
1 : ETX code in ASCII/ISO
NOTE
Use of ASCII/ISO is specified by ASC.
[PRA] Communication protocol

0 : Protocol B
1 : Protocol A
[R42] Interface
0 : RS–232–C interface
1 : RS–422 interface
[RMS] State of remote/tape operation when protocol A is used
0: Always 0 is returned.
1: Contents of the change request of the remote/tape operation in the
SET command from the host is returned.
NOTE
203
12. QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
12 QUICK EDITOR
204
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12. QUICK EDITOR
12.1 QUICK EDITOR is a full–screen editor which is the exclusive one to

ROBODRILL and provides various functions to edit a CNC program on
OVERVIEW the QUICK SCREEN.
205
12.2
FEATURES AND
NOTES OF QUICK
EDITOR
12.2.1
Features of QUICK (1) QUICK EDITOR provides an editing area of 1000 lines. Each line
EDITOR can consist of up to 46 characters.
(2) Each editing operation can be performed at an arbitrary position in the
editing area by using page key, cursor key, or cursor jump function
(see Subsec. 12.5.5).
(3) It is unnecessary to enter EOB (end of block).
QUICK EDITOR interprets one line in the editing area as one block
in principle, and add EOB to each line when a program is registered
in the CNC.
But some lines in the editing area can be treated as one block by using
continuous line function (see Subsec. 12.5.9).
(4) It is possible to edit the machining program in the operation.
Consequently the machining program can be modified while the
machining processes are checked. But the program is not applied
immediately because the program cannot be registered in the CNC in
the operation (see Subsec. 12.5.3).
(5) G and M codes can be specified very easily.
Consequently the number of use of alphabet is reduced and the fact
that no address key exists on the operator’s panel does not cause
inconvenience. Furthermore addresses which follow G or M code are
displayed automatically. This is very useful to a CNC programmer.
12.2.2
Notes (1) The program with lines more than 1000 cannot be edited (created).
(2) During background editing, a program cannot be edited, cannot be
registered, and cannot be deleted by QUICK EDITOR.
(3) If the alphabet keyboard type operator’s panel is provided, some
functions cannot be used.
(4) Before registering or deleting the program currently being executed,
note the contents of the notes appended to each description. Similarly,
before performing other operations, note the contents of the relevant
notes.
206
12.3 This chapter describes how to display the QUICK EDITOR screen and
how to select each editing function.
QUICK EDITOR
SCREEN
12.3.1 QUICK EDITOR screen is in the QUICK SCREEN (screen number:
Procedure for 23).Procedures for displaying QUICK EDITOR screen are as follows.
Displaying QUICK (1) The way by using soft–keys
Press the soft–key [OPERATON] for screen change.
EDITOR Screen
The menu of “OPERATION” group is displayed on the soft–key for

screen change.
Then press [QUICK EDITOR].
(2) The way by inputting screen number and page key

Press “2”, “3”, and page key on the operator’s panel because QUICK
EDITOR screen number is “23”.
P.PAGE
2 å 3 å or
PROG SET
N.PAGE
QUICK EDITOR screen (next page) is displayed by the above way (1) or
(2).
Current mode
207
NOTE
The last program will be read and displayed on the editing
area automatically after QUICK EDITOR screen is selected.
But if QUICK EDITOR screen is displayed for the first time
after power on, the program whose number is selected in
the CNC screen is displayed.
12.3.2 For [QUICK EDITOR], there are two modes: browse mode and edit
mode.
Browse Mode and Edit
Mode (1) Browse mode
You can only reference or delete existing programs. You cannot
create a new program or edit any program.
(2) Edit mode
You can create a new program and edit a program using various
edit functions described later.
[QUICK EDITOR] is in the browse mode immediately after selected. In

this mode, you can reference a program, but cannot create a new program
or edit any program.
Pressing soft key [EDIT] displays the cursor and puts the screen in the edit
mode. You can create and edit a program.
The current mode is displayed at the upper right of the edit area.
12.3.3 Pressing soft key [EDIT] on [QUICK SCREEN] shown on the previous
Selecting an Edit page changes the displayed soft keys as shown below. You can create and
edit a program. (Edit mode)
Function
In this mode, the screen cannot be changed because the left–side soft keys
are also assigned edit functions. To switch to another screen, press END.
Pressing the rightmost soft key changes the edit functions assigned to the
right–side soft keys as follows:
For details of each edit function, see Section 12.5, “Quick Editor Edit
Functions”.
208
12.4
INPUT FUNCTION OF
QUICK EDITOR
12.4.1 Pressing the key on the operator’s panel displays alphabetic

Entering Alphabetic
Characters and characters and symbols in the soft key area. You can press a desired soft
Symbols key to enter the corresponding character or symbol.
For entering alphabetic characters and symbols, there are two modes:
HALF mode and FULL mode.
(1) HALF mode (frequently used alphabetic characters and symbols)
PAGE
MODE
Switching to the
FULL mode
(2) FULL mode (all alphabetic characters and symbols)
Switching to the
HALF mode
Pressing the key again displays the names of edit functions in the
soft key area.
NOTE
An operator’s panel having a full keyboard does not have
this function.
209
12.4.2
Simple Input of G and
M Codes
When G or M code is entered, addresses possible to follow the G code

or the M code are displayed in the window. Enter numerical values if
necessary.
In the window for G code, some G codes can also be entered.
Only words specified in the window are entered in the editing area by
pressing the soft–key [OK] or <INSERT> key on the operator’s panel.
If the soft–key [CANCEL] is pressed, no word is entered in the editing

area.
When no numerical value is entered in the window, [CANCEL], [OK],
and <INSERT> key are the same function.
A numerical value entered in the window once is canceled by pressing
<INPUT> key after moving the cursor.
NOTE
The G code and the M code must be specified with 2 digits
long.
210
12.4.3
Simple Input of Words
by Input Key
Addresses which are frequently used independently of G or M code are

displayed in the window by pressing <INPUT> key on the operator’s
panel.
Words can be entered in the editing area similarly to “12.4.2 Simple input
of G and M code” without using alphabet.
See the previous page for details of the use of the operator’s panel (such
as the functions of the [OK], [CANCEL], and <INSERT> keys). The
above function, which is performed using the <INPUT> key, is useful for
repeating a canned cycle.
12.4.4
Other Operations (1) To enter a space, use the [INSERT] key on the operator’s panel.
(2) To delete the character to the left of the cursor, use the [CANCEL]
key.
(3) To delete the character at the cursor, use the [DELETE] key.
211
12.5
EDITING FUNCTION
OF QUICK EDITOR
12.5.1
Selecting the Program
The above window is displayed by pressing the soft–key [PROG.

SELECT] .
There are two means to select the program.
(1) Select a desired program number from the program list moving the
cursor in the window, and press the soft–key [SELECT] .
(2) Enter a desired program number by using numeric key on the
operator’s panel, (the <INPUT> key need not be pressed) and press
the soft–key [SELECT] .
When a desired program is selected by using the above means (1) or (2),
if the program is already registered, the corresponding program is
displayed on the editing area.
If the program number is for an unregistered program, the only program
number is displayed and program creation begins.
NOTE
1 In the browse mode, you can select only an existing
program.
2 In the edit mode, you cannot select any protected program.
3 The protected program cannot be selected.
4 The program with lines more than 999 cannot be edited and
created.
212
12.5.2
Deleting the Program
The above window is displayed by pressing the soft–key [PROG.

DELETE].
To delete a program, deletion of multiple programs (with specifying a
range) either of the following can be selected: the deletion of one program
or the deletion of all programs.
(1) Deleting one program
Select a desired program number from the program list moving the
cursor in the window, or enter a desired program number by using
numeric key on the operator’s panel (the <INPUT> key need not be
pressed). Then press the soft–key [DELETE].
When pressing [DELETE], the following message and soft–key are
displayed. The program with the specified program number is deleted
by pressing [EXEC].
(2) Deletion of multiple programs

Pressing soft key PLURAL displays the following window. Enter the
numbers of the first and last programs to be deleted to specify a
deletion range.
After specifying the deletion range, press soft key EXEC.

(3) Deleting all programs
The following message and soft–key are displayed by pressing the
soft–key [ALL PROGS.].
All programs registered in the CNC are deleted by pressing [EXEC].
213
NOTE
1 When the machine is in the operation, the executing
program cannot be deleted.
2 The main program cannot be deleted during execution of a
subprogram.
3 While a subprogram is being executed, it is possible to
delete another sub–program called by the same main
program. But if a subprogram with the deleted subprogram
number is not registered before the subprogram is called,
alarm (No. 078) occurs.
4 A protected program cannot be deleted.
5 When the machine is in the operation, all programs cannot
be deleted.
6 When the deletion of all programs is executed, all programs
other than those which have been protected (those having
a program number between 9000 and 9999) will be cleared.
214
12.5.3 The following message and soft–key are displayed by pressing the
Registering the soft–key [REGISTER].
Then the program can be registered in the CNC by pressing [EXEC].
Program
(1) When a new program is registered
(2) When a program with the same number has already been registered
NOTE
1 When the machine is in the operation, the executing
program cannot be registered until the operation is finished.
But it is possible to edit it.
2 After the executing program is edited, if screen change or
program selection is performed, a message which asks
whether to register the program is displayed. (See section
12.5.14. )
As described in Note 1, however, [YES] cannot be selected.
If [NO] is selected, the change will not be reflected in the
program. In this case, screen change or program selection
can be executed by the following procedure.
(1)Change the program number into an unregistered
number, and register it.
(2)Perform screen change or program selection.
(3)After the operation is finished, return the program
number (1) to the former one, and register it.
(4)The program registered in step (1) is no longer required
(because it was reregistered in step (3)). Delete it.
3 While a subprogram is being executed, it is possible to edit
and register another subprogram called by the same main
program. But if the subprogram is called in the midst of the
registration, alarm (No. 078) occurs.
4 If an inappropriate format for the CNC exists in a program,
the registration might end in failure. In this case, register the
program again after modification on the inappropriate
format.
5 If the power is turned off without registering a edited
program, the modification become null.
6 Always enter a four–digit program number following “O” in
the first line.
215
12.5.4
Copy and Move (by
Line) The above soft–key is displayed by pressing the soft–key
[COPY/MOVE].
But [EXEC] is not displayed when this function is selected for the first
time after displaying QUICK EDITOR screen.
[EXEC] is used to insert the range specified previously or to insert the
range in another program.
Procedure for copying

(1) The following soft–key is displayed by pressing the soft–key
[COPY].
(2) Move the cursor to the start of the range to be copied and press the
soft–key [START]. Then the following soft–key is displayed.
(3) Specify the range to be copied by moving the cursor. Then the range
is displayed reversely. The range is specified by pressing the soft–key
[END] and then the display is returned to a normal one.
(4) Executing
(a) Copying the specified range in the same program
Move the cursor to the line at which the range is to be inserted and
press the soft–key [EXEC] .
If you want to copy the same range successively, press
[COPY/MOVE] and [EXEC] .
(b) Copying the specified range in another program
Press the soft–key [CANCEL] first. (The specified range is not
lost by pressing [CANCEL].)
Press the soft–key [PROG. SELECT] and select a program in
which the range is to be inserted.
After the program is displayed, move the cursor to the line at
which the range is to be inserted and press the soft–key
[COPY/MOVE] and [EXEC] .
Procedure for moving

Moving is the same as copying, except that the specified range is deleted.
216
NOTE
1 If the program will exceed 1000 lines by copying, copying
cannot be executed.
2 The range to be copied or moved cannot be specified by the
character.
3 The range to be copied or moved can be specified up to 100
lines.
12.5.5
Cursor Jump
The above window and soft–key are displayed by pressing the soft–key
[CURSOR JUMP] . Select from the soft–key.
[TOP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor is moved to the top of the program.

[GO TO LINE] . . . . . . . When the line number of the destination of
jump is entered according to the message, the
cursor is positioned to the specified line.
[BOTTOM] . . . . . . . . . The cursor is moved to the bottom of the
program.
12.5.6
Search for the
Specified Word
The above window is displayed by pressing the soft–key [SEARCH].

The [EXEC ±] soft key is used to perform downward search, and the
[EXEC °] soft key is used to perform upward search.
Upon entering a word for which a search is to be made, it is displayed in
reverse video at the bottom of the window. Press the [EXEC ±] or [EXEC
°] soft key after entering the word. The window is closed and the cursor
is positioned to the point at which the specified word was first found.
217
If the specified word is not found, the message “THE WORD IS NOT
FOUND.” is displayed.
That word for which a search was made most recently remains stored in
the system. Therefore, to subsequently search for the same word again,
it is only necessary to press [SEARCH] then [EXEC±]³[EXEC °]. The
word itself does not have to be entered again.
Pressing [SEARCH] causes the word for which a search was last made,
if any, to appear at the bottom of the window.
NOTE
The word to be searched for can be specified up to 10
letters.
12.5.7 You can simply enter words frequently used for creating custom macros.
Entering a Macro Pressing soft key [ENTERING A MACRO STATEMENT] displays the
following window:
Statement
To input a character displayed in the window in the edit area, move the
cursor to the character to be input and press INPUT.
NOTE
When the window is displayed, the cursor in the window is
moved. Before using this function, move the cursor to the
position in which a character is to be input.
218
12.5.8 Pressing soft key [COMMENT SECTION] displays the following

Entering a Comment [COMMENT SECTION]
Window:
When you enter a character string, it is temporarily displayed at the

bottom of the window. After entry, press soft key [EXEC]. The window
is closed and the input comment enclosed by parentheses is inserted or
overwritten in the cursor position.
NOTE
A comment input using this function cannot extend over
multiple lines.
You can check the positions of the parentheses at the
bottom of the window to see the allowable length for
inputting a comment in the current position.
12.5.9
Setting and Cancel of
Continuous Line
(a)
Move the cursor to the desired line and press the soft–key [CONT. LINE].
Then the mark of “+” is displayed at the right side of the line. (See the
above (a).)
The mark of “+” means that a line which has the mark is followed by the
next line. And those lines are treated as one block.
If you want to cancel this function, move the cursor to the disired line and
press the soft–key [CONT.LINE] again. Then the mark of “+” disappears
and the treatment as one block is canceled.
219
NOTE
This function cannot be used at the bottom of the editing
area.
12.5.10 A line is inserted by pressing the soft–key [INSERT 1 LINE] and then the
cursor is moved to the head of the line.
Inserting a Line
NOTE
If the bottom line (line 999) of the editing area is not empty,
this function cannot be executed.
12.5.11 The current line is deleted by pressing the soft–key [DELETE 1 LINE].
Deleting a Line
12.5.12 Pressing the [ALTER] key on the operator’s panel switches back and forth
Setting of Inserting or between the insert mode and write–over mode.
The currently selected mode is displayed at the upper right of the edit area.
Overwriting Mode
12.5.13 Pressing soft key [FUNCTION SELECTION] displays the following

window. You can sets the function of the up and down arrow keys to
Selecting the Function
[ONLY UP AND DOWN] or [GO TO LEFT AFTER THAT].
Then, select a function of the selected item by pressing the [SELECT↑]
or [SELECT↓] soft key.
Pressing the [END] soft key closes the window and sets the selected
function.
220
12.5.14 After editing a program, if screen change or program selection is

Screen Change and performed without registering the program, the following message and
soft–key are displayed. Then select from the soft–key in accordance with
Program Selection the message.
after Editing
When changes are made to a read program, UPDATED is displayed at the
upper left of the screen.
[YES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen change or program selection is

performed after the current program is
registered.
[NO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen change or program selection is
performed without registering the current
program.
[CANCEL] . . . . . . . . . . Screen change or program selection is not
performed.
221
13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL
PROGRAMMING
(SUPER C.A.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01
13 QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)
222
13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL
PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C.A.P iM)
13.1 (1) This section uses some abbreviated names as follows:

(a) Conversational programming using SUPER C.A.P iM is referred
OVERVIEW to as the conversational function.
(SUPER C.A.P iM) (b) A part program created and edited by conversational programming
using SUPER C.A.P iM is referred to as a conversational program.
(c) A part program created and edited in the NC format is referred to
as an “NC statement”.
(2) This section briefly describes the conversational function. For details
including the operation, setting data, notes and cautions, and so forth
of each function, refer to “FANUC SUPER C.A.P iM OPERATOR’S
MANUAL”.
223
PROGRAMMING
13.2
CONVERSATIONAL
PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION
13.2.1 (1) Creating and editing a conversational program

Operation (a) Study the settings of jigs and tools while viewing the machining
drawings.
Keep a record of the study together with the machining drawings.
1 Which program number is to be assigned? (If plural programs
already exist, a unique number must be assigned. )
2 Where is the reference point in a workpiece coordinate syetem?
(In general, the center of an air chuck or a corner of the mouth
piece of a machine vise is selected. )
In addition, determine whether to machine multiple workpiece.
3 Which tools are used? Which turret numbers are assigned to
the tools?
4 Which surface is used as the reference surface for tool length
compensation setting ?
(For example, the Z axis coordinate where the tool tip contacts
the workpiece surface is used.)
(b) Upon completion of these studies, proceed to the creation and
editing of a conversational program.
1 Create a cutting condition file.
A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.1.
2 Create a tool file.
3 Create a pre– tool file.
4 Set a workpiece coordinate system.
5 Create and edit a conversational program.
A detailed explanation is provided in sections 13.4. , and 13.5.
(2) Conversational program checking and execution

1 Mount a tool on the turret, then measure and set tool length
compensation and cutter compensation data.
2 In multiple workpiece machining, set multiple workpiece setting
as required.
3 Use the drawing functions (tool path drawing, animated
simulation) to check a created machining program.
See Section 13.6.
4 Select the conversational program subject to execution.
5 Perform test machining in the same way as for memory operation.
If there is a problem, correct the program.
224
PROGRAMMING
13.2.2 Note the restrictions on the conversational function as described below.

Notes (1) Cutting condition file/automatic cutting condition determination
function
(a) Even if the cutting condition file data is set again, no spindle speed
and feedrate already edited in the conversational program change
after a conversational program is created and edited.
(b) With the conversational function, the automatic cutting condition
determination function determines a spindle speed and feedrate at
the time of program creation.
Note that the above function uses only data set in the cutting
condition file and the number of teeth on the tool in the tool file for
its computation.
However, actual machining requires some changes after initial
setting. For example, peck drilling requires the setting of a slower
feedrate to match the hole depth.
End milling requires different feedrates for side cutting and
grooving. In these cases, change a spindle speed and feedrate
determined during conversational program creation.
(2) Tool file/pre–tool file/automatic pre–tool selection function

(a) Even if the tool file or pre– tool file is set again, the tools and related
conditions set in the conversational program already edited does
not change after conversational program creation and editing.
Tool name is allotted to each tool ID number beforehand.
(3) Functions for random and pattern machining in multiple quantities

(a) For multiple workpiece machining, a range of functions are
available. These are the all–copy (random) function, all–copy
(pattern) function, group copy (random) function, group copy
(pattern) function, and group copy (rotation) function.
Use the all–copy (random and pattern) functions in the process
immediately following initialization. Use the group copy (random,
pattern, and rotation) functions immediately after initialization, or
in the process immediately after an all–copy operation if selected.
Note that the all–copy (random) function and the all–copy (pattern)
function cannot be used together in the same program.
(b) The all–copy (random) function can machine up to six workpieces,
placed in arbitrary positions according, to the same machining
program. The all–copy (random) function uses workpiece
coordinate systems 1 through 6 (G54 through G59) for workpiece
positioning. When the all–copy (random) function is used,
machining is performed by changing the settings of workpiece
coordinate systems 1 through 6 (G54 through G59).
225
PROGRAMMING
If a program is created without first setting the workpiece positions

on the data setting screen of the all–copy (random) function, the
program is executed using the workpiece coordinate system
settings available when the program is started. If workpiece
positions are set on the data setting screen of the all–copy (random)
function, the settings of the workpiece coordinate systems before
the program is started will differ from those after the program is
terminated.
(c) The all–copy (pattern) function can perform multiple workpiece
machining based on a displacement in the X and Y directions,
according to the same program. No limit is imposed on the number
of workpieces to be machined. The all–copy (pattern) function
uses workpiece coordinate system 6 (G56) for workpiece
positioning. When the all–copy (pattern) function is used,
machining is performed by changing the setting of workpiece
coordinate system 6 (G59) for each workpiece position.
The setting of workpiece coordinate system 6 (G59) before the
program is started differs from that after the program is terminated.
(d) The group copy (random) function or group copy (pattern) function
is used for multiple workpiece machining at arbitrary positions, or
at intervals on the X–Y plane, according to the machining pattern
of a program. The group copy (rotation) function is used to rotate
and copy a machining pattern of a program on the X–Y plane.
(e) In multiple workpiece machining, the workpiece coordinate
system of each machining data setting screen is ignored; only the
workpiece coordinate system specified on the multi–ple workpiece
machining screen is valid.
(f) For details of the multiple workpiece machining function, refer to
the “FANUC Super CAP iM Operator’s Manual.”
(4) Tool compensation

(a) The following shows the tool length compensation command in the
conversational function:
G 90 G 00 G 43 Z ** H ** ;
Tool compensation number
Input data at common safety Z point
Accordingly, as the amount of tool length compensation, set the

relative Z axis coordinate where the tool tip contacts the workpiece
(or jig) reference plane on the table. See “13.3.4 Tool Geometry
Compensation” for how to specify it.
The above instructions do not include G17 (plane specification) .
So if G18 or G19 remains as modal before the conversational
program is executed, the tool may move along the X or Y axis when
the instruction above is executed.
226
PROGRAMMING
(b) Cutter compensation C is used for cutter compensation when the

conversational function is used. So, as the amount of cutter
compensation, set the radius of a tool.
See “13.3.4 Tool Geometry Compensation” for how to specify it.
(5) Setting a coordinate system for a workpiece

(a) With the conversational function, select a number from 1 to 5 for
COORDINATE on each conversational data input screen. Never
use work piece coordinate system 6.
(b) When a conversational program operation creates a local
coordinate system as in machining multiple workpieces, a local
coordinate system available until then is cancelled.
(6) Other conversational program editing operations

(a) A conversational program can insert no comments in parentheses.
(b) If the machine tool is running at the time of conversational program
creation and editing, background editing is selected automatically.
Except for this case, the current mode is switched to the edit mode
automatically at the time of conversational program creation and
editing.
(c) When using the conversational function for background editing, if
an alarm occurs in the conversational mode, do not press the
<RESET> key. Otherwise, the program being executed in the
foreground will stop. Once the foreground program stops, it cannot
be restarted. To reset this alarm, press the <CAN> key.
(7) Restrictions on program execution

(a) Be sure to execute a conversational program from the beginning of
a program.
(b) No conversational program can be executed, with the mirror image
set on.
(c) Conversational program cannot be called by G66. (Program
initialization specifies the cancellation of modal calling. )
(8) External I/O

(a) No offset value for multiple workpiece machining can input/output
to an external memory through the reader/puncher interface.
227
PROGRAMMING
13.3 The following data must be specified before a conversational program can
be created.
SETTING SEVERAL
DATA (a) Cutting condition file : This file contains data from which cutting
conditions are derived for automatic setting
according to the workpiece and tool
materials. The file initially contains cutting
conditions for seven types of workpiece
materials. Select [CUTTING CONDITION
FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of
[QUICK SCREEN] to set data.
(b) Tool file : This file contains the specified tool materials
and dimensions. A tool name, tool length,
and cutter compensation number are assigned
to each tool ID number beforehand, such that
the tool ID numbers cannot be changed.
Select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P
SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] of [QUICK
SCREEN] to set data.
(c) Pre– tool file : This file specifies the tools used in
preparatory cutting.
The tools may include a drill used before the
final cutting, such as tapping, in
multi–toolmachining, as typified in the case
of prepared holes.
Select [PRE–TOOL FILE] on [QUICK
C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] of
[QUICK SCREEN] to set data.
(d) Tool geometry compensation : For cutter compensation, select
[TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P
SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to
set data for end mills, face milling
cutters, and chamfering tools.
For tool length compensation, select
[TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P
set data for all tools. Alternatively,
select [MAGAZINE DATA] on
[QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of
[QUICK SCREEN].
Tool compensation number (H–code,
D–code) is allotted to each tool ID
number beforehand.
Therefore specified data is set to the
corresponding tool compensation
number automatically.
(e) Workpiece coordinate system : Positional data used as a reference in
mounting a workpiece is specified.
Use [COORDINATES/OFFSET
set data.
228
PROGRAMMING
The above data can be specified in the QUICK SCREEN. A detailed

explanations are provided in the following sections.
13.3.1 For each of two types of tool materials, cutting conditions (cutting speeds,
feedrates) for up to eight types of workpiece materials can be registered.
Cutting Condition File
(Cutting conditions for up to seven workpiece materials are already
registered. )
A cutting condition is not set for a special workpiece material. This
material should be specified by the user as required.
To set cutting condition data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P
SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN].
First, display [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN].
Move the cursor to [TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. The
screen for setting cutting condition data appears.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
229
PROGRAMMING
Item Contents
1 CUTTING SPEED For CARBIDE and HIGH–SPEED STEEL of tool

materials, the cutting speed for each of workpiece
materials can be registered.
@ CARBIDE : including coated car-
bide
@ HIGH–SPEED STEEL : including powdersinter/
coating high–speed
steel
2 FEED FOR EACH The feed for each cutting blade can be specified
CUTTING BLADE except TAP.
The feed is common to all tool materials.
It is unnecessary to specify a feedrate for TAP be-
cause it is automatically determined by the pitch.
4 FEED The feedrate is adjusted with a compensation factor

COEFFICIENT that corresponds to the nominal diameter of the
tool. This data is common to all tool materials.
It is unnecessary to specify this data for TAP.
3 NOMINAL Specify a range of nominal diameter for feed coeffi-

DIAMETER cient (4).
This data applies to all tools except TAP.
It is unnecessary to specify this data for TAP.
5 TOOL SELEC- A tool can be selected to register cutting conditions.

TION A WINDOW is displayed by pressing [TOOL SE-
LECT] of SOFT–KEY.
Then operate in accordance with instructions in the
WINDOW.
230
PROGRAMMING
13.3.2 For each tool, tool materials and dimensions are specified. With a
Tool File conversational program, cutting conditions such as S and F can be
automatically determined just by programming the tool ID numbers of
registered tools.
To set tool data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P.SCREEN] of
[QUICK SCREEN].
First, display [QUICK C.A.P.SCREEN].
Move the cursor to [TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. The
screen for setting tool data appears.
(1)
(2)
231
PROGRAMMING
(1) Tool data

Item Contents
1 TOOL No. TOOL No. is the ID number which is allotted to

each tool beforehand.
This is used to create a conversational program.
The numbers are allotted as follows.
TOOL NAME TOOL No. TOOL NAME TOOL No.
CENTER DRILL 1–10 BACK BORE 81– 85

DRILL 11–50 END MILL 86–105
TAP 51–70 FACE MILL 106–110
REAMER 71–75 CHAMFER 111–115
BORE 76–80
2 NOMINAL DIA. Specify the outside diameter of the tool.

Data on the TOOL No. (the following data) are can-
celed by setting “0” to nominal diameter.
3 MATERIAL Select a material of the tool from the following

SOFT–KEYS.
4 RADI. COMP. Specify the tool radius compensation value.

(ONLY FOR END A compensation number is assigned to each tool ID
MILL, FACE MILL, number as listed in the following table:
AND CHAM–FER)
TOOL NAME TOOL No. D–CODE
END MILL 86–105 166–185

FACE MILL 106–110 186–190
CHAMFER 111–115 191–195
5 LENG. COMP. Specify the tool length compensation value.

A compensation number is assigned to each tool ID
number as listed in the following table:
TOOL NAME TOOL No. H–CODE
CENTER DRILL 1– 10 41– 50

DRILL 11– 50 51– 90
TAP 51– 70 101–120
REAMER 71– 75 121–125
BORE 76– 80 126–130
BACK BORE 80– 85 131–135
END MILL 86–105 136–155
FACE MILL 106–110 156–160
CHAMFER 111–115 161–165
6 PITCH For TAP, specify the pitch of the tapping screw

(ONLY FOR TAP) thread.
7 S–DIA. For CHAMFER, specify the diameter of the smaller

(ONLY FOR tool end.
CHAMFER)
SMALLER DIAMETER
8 No. TOOTH Specify the number of teeth.

(ONLY FOR END
MILL, FACE MILL,
AND CHAMFER)
9 EDGE ANGLE For CHAMFER, specify the angle of the tip of the
(ONLY FOR cutting tool. (typically 90°)
CHAMFER)
232
PROGRAMMING
Item Contents
10 LENGTH OF CUT Specify the length of the blade of the cutting tool.
11 HOLE–BOTTOM Specify the distance between the measurement

COMPENSATION point (tool tip) for tool length compensation and a
point to determine the effective depth (correspond-
ing to the nominal diameter).
When machining holes, this is the hole–bottom
compensation value by which the hole is cut beyond
the specified effective depth.
In chamfering, this is the clearance between the
blade tip and the smaller–diameter end.
Clearance
(ONLY FOR
CHAMFER)
Hole–bottom compensation value
12 CORNER–R Specify the radius of the corner on the tip of the end
(ONLY FOR END milling or face milling tool blade.
MILL, AND FACE
MILL)
13 TOOL SELECT Select a target tool for setting tool data.

Pressing this soft key displays a window. Enter the
number of a desired tool according to the instruc-
tions. Various types of data items related to the
selected tool are displayed on the screen.
233
PROGRAMMING
13.3.3 Program creation and editing for multi– step cutting (such as tapping) can
Pre–Tool File be simplified by creating a pre– tool file.
Example : When it is necessary to drill a center hole and prepare it for tapping, the
drills used in these steps are specified as pre–tools for taps.
Up to eight pre–tools can be specified for a single final tool. Pre–tools
can be specified for up to 80 final tools.
To set pre–tool data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN]
of [QUICK SCREEN].
First, display [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN].
Move the cursor to [PRE–TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT].
The screen for setting pre–tool data appears.
(1)
(2)
234
PROGRAMMING
Item Contents
1 AUX TOOL Pre–tools can be specified for up to 80 final tools

FIN TOOL (27 pages).
PRETOOL1 Next page or back page is displayed by pressing
PRETOOL2 PAGE KEY.
PRETOOL3 Specify only TOOL No., which is used to display the
PRETOOL4 tool name and nominal diameter from the tool file
PRETOOL5 automatically.
PRETOOL6 (a) FIN TOOL : Specify TOOL No. of the tool to be
PRETOOL7 used in the final machining step.
PRETOOL8
(b) PRETOOL1 TO 8 : Specify TOOL No. for ma-
chining steps before the final
step. Use lower numbers for
steps closer to the final step,
starting with pre–tool num-
ber 1 for the step nearest the
final step, without skipping a
number.
(c) AUX TOOL : Specify the TOOL No. for the
chamfering step that followed a
drilling step.
(NOTE1) A machining sequence using pre–tools
is as follows.
PRETOOL8→PRETOOL7→
FINAL TOOL→AUXILIARY TOOL
(NOTE2) Set “0” for unnecessary steps.
(NOTE3) For an auxiliary tool, specify the TOOL
No. for a tool used after the final tool.
Chamfering tap holes must, however, be
performed before the final or tapping
step.
Specify PRETOOL1 for the chamfering
step.
2 TOOL LIST TOOL LIST (TOOL No., tool name, and nominal
diameter) is displayed by pressing SOFT–KEY.
Only for DRILL, there are 2 pages and they are dis-
played by pressing [DRILL 1/2] or [DRILL 2/2] of
SOFT–KEY alternately.
All other tool data is displayed on a single page.
The tool list is useful for setting the management
number of an auxiliary tool, final tool, and pre–tools
1 to 8.
235
PROGRAMMING
13.3.4 Cutter compensation (tool radius compensation) data is specified only for
Tool Geometry end mill, face mill, and chamfer in the TOOL FILE SCREEN in the
QUICK C.A.P SCREEN. A detailed explanation is provided in “13.3.2
Compensation Tool file”.
Tool length compensation data is specified for all tools in the TOOL FILE
SCREEN or the MAGAZINE DATA SCREEN in the QUICK C.A.P
SCREEN. A detailed explanation is provided in “13.3.2 Tool file” or this
section (in the case of use of the MAGAZINE DATA SCREEN) .
First, display [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN], move the cursor to
[MAGAZINE DATA], and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen for
setting cartridge data appears.
(2)
(1) (3)
Item Contents
1 TOOL No. Set the ID number of a tool to be mounted for each

tool number (T code). When the ID number is in-
put, the name and nominal diameter of the tool are
automatically displayed.
(NOTE) You cannot enter the ID number of a tool
that has already been set for another tool
number.
2 TOOL LENGTH Set tool length compensation. Tool length com-

COMPENSATION pensation can also be set by selecting [TOOL FILE]
on [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN].
Pressing soft key [AUTO SET] can also set the cur-
rent Z machine coordinate as tool length com-
pensation.
A compensation number is assigned to each tool ID
number as listed in the following table:
TOOL NAME TOOL No. H–CODE
CENTER DRILL 1– 10 41– 50

DRILL 11– 50 51– 90
TAP 51– 70 101–120
REAMER 71– 75 121–125
BORE 76– 80 126–130
BACK BORE 80– 85 131–135
END MILL 86–105 136–155
FACE MILL 106–110 156–160
CHAMFER 111–115 161–165
236
PROGRAMMING
Item Contents
3 TOOL LIST The contents of the tool file (ID numbers, tool
names, and nominal diameters) are listed.
It is useful to reference this [TOOL LIST] when set-
ting an ID number.
13.3.5 Positional data used as a reference in mounting a workpiece is specified

in the COORDINATES/OFFSET in the QUICK SCREEN.
Workpiece Coordinate
System
(1)
(2)
(3)
Item Contents
1 GRAPHICAL The present position of tool and the origin of work-

DISPLAY piece coordinate system are displayed graphically.
2 WORK Input the workpiece coordinate system number.

COORDINATE Then specify the origin of the workpiece coordinage
SYSTEM system.
237
PROGRAMMING
Item Contents
3 AUTOMATIC It is possible to set the present machine position to

SETTING workpiece coordinates.
At this time, you can also set the value obtained by
adding a desired adjustment value to each machine
coordinate.
When the window is displayed, press soft key [X–

EXEC] or [Y–EXEC]. The value obtained by adding
the adjustment value to the current machine coordi-
nate for each axis is automatically set as the work-
piece coordinate origin.
Supplement) When adding the Z–axis to the auto-
matic workpiece coordinate system
setting, set the following parameter:
PMC parameter keep relay K0 bit 2 = 1
238
PROGRAMMING
13.4 A machining program is created by the following procedure:

CREATING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM
QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN

Start Position the cursor on [PROGRAM MAKE OR EDIT].
SELECT +
Program creation screen

> INPUT PROGRAM NO.
Automatic EXEC SEARCH

â
Title input
– Enter a program name.
Initial setting – Enter the initial data (workpiece material, coolant,

reference coordinate system) required for machining.
– Select a desired machining menu.
HOLE FACING SIDE POCKET NC

CUTING /GROOV LAN-
Selection of a machining menu GUAGE
2+1/2 2+1/2 AUX- PROGRM

CVX CCV ILIARY END
Specification of the machining data – In response to messages displayed on the screen,
(1) Specify a machining method. → Position on the

(*1) Z–axis, tool (preparation menu)
(*2)
(2) Specify the figure data. → Positions on the X– and
Y–axes (figure menu)
Program end (3) Specify the process end.
Repeat these steps until all machining data is specified.
– Select [PROGRM END].
End
2+1/2 2+1/2 AUX- PROGRM
CVX CCV ILIARY END
239
PROGRAMMING
First, the operator selects a machining menu, then enters the type of
machining, figure of product, and other data in response to inquiries on
the screen. The operator repeats this process to generate a machining
program.
*1 The machining data is specified in the following procedures. The
menu of (1) below is automatically displayed only once immediately
after the machining menu is selected.
ã
(1) (2) (3)
Preparation menu Figure menu Process end
. Drilling Hole position Process end
This step can be repeated.
. Facing start menu Corresponding facing menu Process end
. Side cutting start menu Corresponding side cutting menu Process end
. Contouring start menu Corresponding contouring menu Contour end
. Pocketing start menu Corresponding pocket cutting menu Process end
Contour pocket /
. Corresponding contouring menu Contour end
grooving start menu
. NC language
. 2 +1/2 start Corresponding 2 +1/2 menu Process end
. Auxiliary
240
PROGRAMMING
A single machining process has the machining data of the [START

MENU], [FIGURE MENU], and [PROCES END]. The system checks
whether the machining data consists of the above three elements and
prevents the operator from creating a machining program which cannot
be executed.
*2 The screen on which the machining data is specified is basically
configured as shown below. The A, B, and C windows show different
data.
A B
Ten soft keys

Return key Next key
A : Program screen that is always displayed. The data in the B and C

windows depend on the data input. The A window always lists the
existing programs.
B : Guide screen that displays the data of the C window with a drawing
or tool file. The cursor is placed on the corresponding parameter in
the C window.
C : Data input screen. Basically, the data is displayed and specified in
this window. The data which cannot be displayed in this window
(data to be determined automatically,cuting conditions, etc.) is
displayed and specified in the B window.
Return key : Displays the previous screen. When the return key can be
used, [<] is indicated here.
Next key : Displays the next part of the currently displayed soft keys.
When the next key can be used, [+] is indicated here.
241
PROGRAMMING
Examples are given below: (In the following example, the number of the
program to be created is assumed to be 3000.)
1. Display [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN] or [QUICK SCREEN].
2. Position the cursor on [PROGRAM MAKE OR EDIT] and press soft

key [SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears.
3. Enter program number 3000 and press the [PROG. SELECT] key.
(When the program is present, the editing screen is displayed. The
explanation of edit operation is omitted here.) After entering a
program number, you can also press the INPUT key on the operator’s
panel to create the program. When a new program is to be created, the
name input screen is automatically displayed in the bottom window.
On this screen, specify a desired program name of up to 16
alphanumeric characters, entered using the MDI keys. Then, press the
[INPUT TITLE] key. The program name is registered in part program
storage. You can also press the INPUT key on the operator’s panel to
register the program. To abandon the registration, press the
[CANCEL] key.
242
PROGRAMMING
4. When the [INPUT TITLE] key is pressed, the initial setting screen is
automatically displayed in the lower window, as shown below:
When the cursor is positioned to an entry in window C, a message
relating to the entry is displayed above the soft keys. The operator
usually enters necessary data, as instructed by the message. On the
guidance in window B, the second cursor blinks at the position
corresponding to the current entry. Being able to see both cursors
enables the easy input of data.
243
PROGRAMMING
The displayed soft keys differ depending on the cursor position as

follows.
– When the cursor is on [Q: MATERIAL]
– When the cursor is on [M: COOLANT]
NOTE
[COOLNT M7] means cutting air blow (option).
– When the cursor is on [W: COORDINATES]
5. After entering all desired data, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The
system automatically checks the input data. If the system finds an
invalid value among the input data, the cursor is placed on that data
and an alarm message is displayed. If all the input data is correct, the
program creation screen is displayed again. The process of initial
setting is incorporated into the following screen:
WARNING
After completing input of the initial setting data, ensure that
all required data is set correctly.
If any data is not set correctly, machining will be performed
under abnormal cutting conditions, such that the workpiece
may be damaged or the tool may collide with the machine
and/or workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool
and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
244
PROGRAMMING
6. Select a desired machining menu. When the soft key [HOLE] is

selected, for example, the following screen is displayed:
7. Select a required detail menu from among hole machining types. As

an example, [06:TAOOING] is selected. The following screen
appears:
245
PROGRAMMING
8. Enter desired data, responding to messages and checking the guidance.

When the system asks about the tool ID number, enter the ID number
of the last tool (the tool to be used last in that machining, excluding
chamfering tools). If required, press the soft key [TOOL INFORM].
The system displays the following screen, on which the required tool
ID number can be easily checked and specified.
9. On the screen, other information (pre–tool list, tool file, tool list) can
be referenced and specified. For example, press the soft key
[PRE–TOOL]. [LIST PRE–TOOL] is displayed on the window as
shown below.
To change the data of the pre–tool list or add data to it, press the soft
key [WINDOW CHANGE]. The cursor moves to the pre–tool list
screen. Place the cursor at a desired position, then enter the desired
data.
NOTE
NOTE Never attempt to modify the tool ID numbers, tool
names, T codes, cutter compensation D codes, and tool
length compensation H codes in the tool file.
246
PROGRAMMING
10.Enter a desired value for [TOOL ID NO]. Automatic tool selection and
automatic cutting condition selection are executed and automatically
determined cutting condition data is displayed on the window.
To change the cutting condition data determined by automatic tool
selection and automatic cutting condition selection, press [WINDOW
CHANGE] to move the cursor to [CUTTING DATA]. Move the
cursor to a desired value and change the value. When a tool ID number
is changed at this time, pressing [F.S. AUTO] executes automatic
cutting condition selection for the tool ID number again and displays
cutting condition data.
To return the cursor to [C WINDOWS], press [WINDOW CHANGE].
11.After checking that all data is correctly entered, press the soft key
[INPUT END]. The system automatically checks all the input data.
When all the input data is correct, the drilling process is incorporated
into the program, and the hole position menu is automatically
displayed on the screen.
247
PROGRAMMING
12.Press the soft key [PARALLEL OGRM], for example. The following
screen is displayed. Enter the desired data. (The data of the point to
be omitted can also be specified.)
13.After entering all the desired data, press the soft key [CHECK].
According to the input data, the hole position is drawn in the right
window. The input data can be easily checked in the window.
248
PROGRAMMING
14.Check that all data is correctly input, then press [INPUT END]. The
[HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM] process is inserted into the
program. The previous [HOLE PATERN] screen appears again.
15.To select another hole position menu, follow the same steps as when
the parallel diagram menu is selected. To terminate drilling, press the
soft key [PROCESS END]. The original program screen is displayed
again.
Repeat these steps to select another machining menu and enter desired
data until a desired machining program is created.
249
PROGRAMMING
16.To terminate a program, press [PROGRAMEND] in the following soft

key display:
As End X Coordinate and End Y Coordinate, specify the position in the

machine coordinate system (G53).
After entering the necessary data, press the [INPUT END] key. This
completes the creation of a new machining program. The screen is
automatically cleared and the basic menu screen appears.
WARNING
No check is made to determine whether the machining
sequence is satisfactory. For example, even if you program
tapping without first preparing a hole, or perform finishing
without first roughing, the machine will nevertheless attempt
to execute the programmed machining sequence.
For this reason, therefore, when using a conversational
function to create a machining program, always confirm that
the machining is performed in a logical sequence.
If the machining sequence is logically incorrect, the tool may
collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities,
possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or
even injury to the user or bystanders.
250
PROGRAMMING
13.5 A machining program created using the conversational automatic

programming function can be edited to create a new machining program
MACHINING by automatically changing the machining sequence as described below.
PROGRAM (This function is referred to as the optimal process editing function.)
OPTIMIZATION
(1) Optimizing the number of tool change operations
Processes that use the same tool can be performed in succession to
minimize the number of tool change operations, thus reducing the
machining time.
For this purpose, the optimal process editing function includes a
function that allows processes to be alternated automatically. This
concept is shown below.
Process (1)
ø5 center drilling
ø10 drilling Optimized program
ø5 center drilling of process (1)

Process (2) Automatic
ø5 center drilling process alteration
ø6.8 drilling ø10 drilling of process (1)
øM8 tapping ø6.8 drilling of process (2)
[EXEC]
øM8 tapping of process (2)
Process (3) ø7 drilling of process (3)
ø5 center drilling
ø7 drilling
251
PROGRAMMING
(2) Optimizing the machining sequence

The machining sequence of processes automatically determined by
the conversational automatic programming function can be changed
so that finishing is performed at the end, thus preventing machining
precision degradation due to heat distortion.
For this purpose, the optimal process editing function includes a
function that allows processes to be alternated manually. This
concept is shown below.
Process (1)
Sequence specification
ø5 center drilling 1.
ø10 drilling 4.
Optimized program

Process (2) Manual
2. process alteration
ø5 center drilling ø5 center drilling of process (3)
ø6.8 drilling 6. ø10 drilling of process (1)
øM8 tapping 7. ø7 drilling of process (3)
[EXEC] ø6.8 drilling of process (2)
Process (3) øM8 tapping of process (2)
ø5 center drilling 3.
ø7 drilling 5.
Below is a detailed description using an example.
WARNING
Even when the optimal process editing function is used, no
check is made to determine whether the machining
sequence is satisfactory. For example, even if you program
tapping without first preparing a hole, or perform finishing
without first roughing, the machine will nevertheless attempt
to execute the programmed machining sequence.
For this reason, therefore, when using a conversational
function to create a machining program, always confirm that
the machining is performed in a logical sequence.
If the machining sequence is logical incorrect, the tool may
collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities,
possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or
even injury to the user or bystanders.
252
PROGRAMMING
13.5.1 Then, the following screen for setting termination appears:

Optimal Process 1. Display [QUICK C.A.P.] screen of [QUICK] screen.
Editing Function 2. Position the cursor on [OPTIMUM PROGRAM] and press soft key
(Automatic Alteration) [SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears.
3. Select a program from the list. The following screen appears:
4. Press soft key [AUTO]. Then, the screen for entering a program
number appears.
253
PROGRAMMING
5. Enter the number of the program to create using the optimal process
editing function (3101 in this case), then press [EXEC]. The screen
changes as follows:
You can specify a target range for the optimum process edit function
(range specification). Selecting [ALL SELECT] specifies the entire
program as the range.
NOTE
1 Only one range can be specified for each partial range
setting operation. For multiple ranges, perform separate
setting operations for each range.
2 An editing range cannot extend from the main program to
a subprogram. If a subprogram is called in a specified
range, the subprogram is not subject to sequence
alteration.
6. As an example, the entire program is optimized. Press soft key [ALL

SELECT]. The screen does not change and the displayed soft keys
change as follows:
254
PROGRAMMING
7. Press [EXEC]. The selected range of machining processes (only the

drilling processes in this example) is rearranged automatically by the
system algorithm to change the machining sequence.
13.5.2 Optimal process editing is shown as follows:

Optimal Process
Editing Algorithm
Drilling Drill 1 Drilling Drill 1 Rules Drilling Drill 1

Drill 2 Hole position A Hole position A
Hole position A Process end Process end
Process end
å Drilling Drill 2 å Drilling Drill 1
Step I Step II
Drilling Drill 1 Hole position A Hole position B
Drill 3 Process end Process end
Hole position B
Process end Drilling Drill 1 Drilling Drill 2
Hole position B Hole position A
Process end Process end
Drilling Drill 3 Drilling Drill 3

Hole position B Hole position B
Process end Process end
When [EXEC] is pressed, a new program is created by the following

internal processing steps:
Step I : Internally creates a program where all tools in the editing range
are resolved on a process–by–process basis. (This step is also
used in manual alteration described in the next section.)
Step II: Rearranges the processes of such a resolved program according
to the rules shown below to create a new program.
255
PROGRAMMING
(1) The execution sequence of the processes in the

same machining menu must not be changed.
Rules
(2) Processes should be chosen in the order of ma-
chining menu creation where possible.
(3) Processes that use the same tool should be cho-

sen in succession where possible.
Rule (1) must always be satisfied. Rule (2) has higher priority
than rule (3); rules (2) and (3) may be ignored when these rules
cannot be satisfied.
NOTE
1 The optimal process editing function changes the sequence of processes by referencing only
the tools used in the program. Therefore, when using the optimal process editing function for
a program, be especially careful when the program includes a process or NC statement that
reverses the sequential relationship.
When the optimal process editing function is used, the following commands must not be
included in the editing range:
– Rotation around the B axis
– Plane selection
– Coordinate system rotation
– Absolute/incremental command
– Workpiece coordinate system setting
– Scaling
– Inch/metric conversion
When optimal process editing is applied to a program including any of these processes and NC
statements, the partial range setting capability of the optimal process editing function must be
used. After checking for any processes whose execution timing must not be changed, the user
who creates the program can then apply optimal process editing to processes whose
sequences may be rearranged. Similarly, be careful not to change the sequence of machining
menus that cannot be reversed.
256
PROGRAMMING
Drilling Drill 1
Drill 2
Hole position A
Process end
Set a partial range for this section.
Drilling Drill 1
Drill 3
Hole position B
Process end
Rotation around the B axis
Drilling Drill 1
Drill 3
Hole position B
Set another partial range for this section.
Process end
⋅
⋅
⋅
NOTE
2 The complete range setting can be used on programs for which the sequence of machining
menus can be reversed.
3 When the system determines that optimization is impossible (for example, when a process for
rotation about the B axis is included in a partial setting range), the system does not perform
optimal process editing, but instead outputs the alarm message NOT SUITABLE COMBINE
PROGRAM.
257
PROGRAMMING
13.5.3 1. Display [QUICK C.A.P.]screen of [QUICK]screen.

Optimal Process 2. Position the cursor on [OPTIMUM PROGRAM] and press soft key
Editing Function [SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears.
(Manual Alteration) 3. Select a program from the list. The following screen appears:
4. Press soft key [ALL SELECT]. Then, the screen for entering a
program number appears.
258
PROGRAMMING
5. Enter the number of the program to be created using the optimal

process editing function (3102 in this case), then press [EXEC]. The
program is renumbered, and the following screen appears.
NOTE
No number is assigned to processes for the initial setting,
figure menu, NC language menu, and other items that need
not be rearranged.
6. Move the cursor to the number of the item to change, then enter a new
sequence number. After entering the number, press [NUMBER]. The
entered number appears by the number item. At the same time, the
other numbers are changed. (When a number is changed to a unique
number, other numbers are changed automatically.) As an example,
numbers 3 and 6 for center drills are changed to 2 and 3.
259
PROGRAMMING
NOTE
The system performs a check to prevent the execution
sequence of processes in the same machining menu from
being changed. If an invalid sequence number is entered,
the system does not perform the renumbering operation,
but instead outputs the alarm message UNJUST NUMBER.
7. Upon completion of sequence number input, press [SET END]. The

screen remains unchanged, but the following soft keys appear:
8. Press [MOVE]. A machining program is created according to the

entered sequence number.
260
PROGRAMMING
13.6 This function is used to check a created machining program by drawing

it. Two functions are available.
MACHINING
PROGRAM CHECK (1) Tool path drawing (wire–frame): The tool path, machining profile,
tool figure, etc. are drawn with lines in three dimensions. The
machining program can be checked closely using this drawing.
(2) Animated simulation (solid): A three–dimensional profile subject to
machining is drawn using surfaces. The machining program can be
easily understood by viewing this simulation.
13.6.1 1. PATH GRAPHIC(EXECUTION)

Tool Path Drawing Display [QUICK C.A.P.]screen of [QUICK]screen, position the
cursor on [PROGRAM CHECK], and press soft key [SELECT].
[PROGRAM DIR] appears. Select a program from the list. The
following screen appears.
The first screen after power–on displays a tool path drawing. After
that, the previously displayed screen appears.
NOTE
1 Set the operation mode to MEM before starting drawing.
2 Press [SOLID GRAPH] to display the animated simulation
screen (solid). A soft key can be used to switch between tool
path drawing and animated simulation.
261
PROGRAMMING
WARNING
Even after tool path drawing has been used to ensure that
the programmed tool path is satisfactory, if the actually
entered data such as the tool offset is not as intended, the
tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine
(including the jig), possibly causing damage to the tool
and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
For this reason, before starting actual machining, ensure
that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine,
for example, by executing the machining program at an
extremely low feedrate with no workpiece mounted in the
machine.
The meanings of each soft key are indicated below.

Soft key Meaning
SOLID GRAPH Switches to the animated simulation screen (solid).
GRAPH PARAM Press to change drawing parameters.
SCALE Enlarges or reduces a part of the drawn figure.
TOOL POS. Displays the current tool center position with a mark.
ERASE Erases all figures drawn up until this soft key is pressed.
SCALING Indicates whether to use scaling before drawing. Press

ON/OFF this soft key to toggle the display of [SCALING ON] and
[SCALING OFF].
SINGLE Sets and cancels single block mode. Pressing this key
ON/OFF indicates [SINGLE ON] and [SINGLE OFF] alternately.
DRAW START Starts drawing after erase and head search operation. If
scale value setting is incomplete, automatic scaling is per-
formed before drawing is started.
NOTE
The soft keys [SCALING ON/OFF] and [SINGLE BLOCK]
indicate drawing execution conditions. Pressing these soft
keys does not start operation.
f Additional information about [SCALING ON/OFF]

Each time this soft key is pressed, the display of [SCALING ON]
switches to [SCALING OFF], or vice versa. Usually, the
[SCALING OFF] mode is set. If [DRAW START] is pressed when
[SCALING OFF] is displayed, drawing is startedusing the current
scale value data.
If [DRAW START] is pressed when [SCALING ON] is displayed,
automatic scaling is peformed before drawing is started. Scaling
is performed according to the table below.
262
PROGRAMMING
When the machining profile When the machining profile

diplay is provided by the diplay is not provided by the
drawing parameter setting drawing parameter setting
Program created Scaling is performed based Scaling is performed based

in the conversa- on the machining profile. on the tool path. Scaling
tional mode Scaling time is shorter(*1). time is longer.
Ordinary NC pro- Scaling is performed based Scaling is performed based

gram on the tool path. Scaling on the tool path. Scaling
time is longer. time is longer.
*1 When bi–plane drawing is selected, scaling is performed based on the

machining profile and the tool path.
After the results of scaling are set in the maximum value and minimum
value drawing parameters, drawing is started. The tool path drawing is
then displayed in the proper scale on the screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9106 PSCL
PSCL When the previous program number differs from the current program
number on the graphic screen:
0 : The [SCALING OFF] soft key is displayed.
1 : The [SCALING ON] soft key is displayed.
After drawing is performed in the [SCALING ON] mode, the mode is
automatically switched to the [SCALING OFF] mode.
If scaling takes too long, drawing can be started earlier as described below.
1. Stop scaling by using soft key [STOP]. The maximum and
minimum values obtained by this time are set.
2. Press [DRAW START].
A slightly inaccurate scale value is used, but drawing can be performed
by reducing the time for scaling.
f Additional information about [SINGLE ON/OFF]
Each time this soft key is pressed, the display of [SINGLE ON]
switches to [SINGLE OFF], or vice versa. The display of
[SINGLE ON] represents the single block mode. When [SINGLE
OFF] is displayed, continuous drawing is performed.
263
PROGRAMMING
2. Start of tool path drawing

Press [DRAW START] to start drawing.
Soft key Meaning
SINGLE ON/OFF Sets the single block mode when the characters of this soft
key are displayed in reverse video. When this soft key is
pressed in this state, the characters are displayed normally;
the single block mode is released.
STOP Terminates drawing forcibly.
1 BLOCK EXEC. Performs drawing block–by–block in the single block

mode.
When the [SINGLE ON] state is set during drawing, the single block
mode is set. By pressing [1 BLOCK EXEC.] in this state,
block–by–block drawing can be performed. When the [SINGLE OFF]
state is set, operation switches to continuous drawing.
Drawing terminates when an end of program (M02 or M30) is
encountered. Pressing the leftmost soft key displays QUICK. C.A.P
again.
264

robodrill 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

robodrill 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCe

FANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCLe

FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe) α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe)

S No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the

1. INTENDED USE OF THE PRODUCT

2.2 Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive

2.3 Maintenance Engineer

The maintenance engineer must also observe the cautions described

3. ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe) α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe)

The following manuals are related to this machine :

D Soft keys displayed on the bottom of the screen : Enclosed in [ ]

1. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE

Electromagnetic lock switch Internal Light

Front door Fixed cover

Electromagnetic lock switch Internal Light

Front door Fixed cover

(a) Electromagnetic lock switch

Handle workpieces with care.

(1) Be careful with sharp edges and burrs of workpieces.

(2) Fasten a workpiece onto a jig securely.

(3) Do not machine a flammable workpiece.

(4) When mounting or dismounting a heavy workpiece, use a crane

Handle cutters with care.

(1) When using or exchanging a cutter, be careful not to get cuts on

(2) When disposing of cutters, observe any regulations and rules

(3) A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, and

(4) Do not machine workpieces under such a machining condition

(6) When mounting a tool on the turret, fasten it securely according

Carefully handle cuttings.

In handling cuttings, be careful not to hurt yourself. Wear protectors

Be careful when operating the machine with the safety

Do not get close to moving components such as table or turret when

Be careful not to slip on coolants or lubricants

(1) If a coolant or lubricant gets to your hand, immediately wipe it

(2) A floor with a coolant or a lubricant on it is very slippery. It can

When performing maintenance work, turn off the

(1) Be sure to turn off the power whenever performing maintenance

Always wear heat–resistant gloves when handling hot

A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, and

Do not inhale, or expose any part of the body to,

Skin (especially Do not touch directly as If a coolant or lubricant gets

Part of the body

Mucous Wear goggles to protect the If a coolant or lubricant gets

Handle coolants and lubricants (grease and oil) with

(1) Do NOT use flammable coolants.

(3) Coolants become very harmful, when they get rotten.

(4) When handling coolants and lubricants, observe the instructions

Use recommended lubricant.

The following lubricants are recommended:

ALVANIA SHOWA SHELL GUIDE RAIL At the time of

MULTEMP LRL KYODO YUSHI BALL SCREW

MOLY HD SUMICO SPINDLE TOOL When exchanging

MOLYSPEED SUMICO TURRET MECH- When overhauling

ARCANOL FAG SPINDLE BEAR- When exchanging

ANTIRUST Nisseki Mitsubishi GUIDE RAIL At the time of

Super MULPUS Nisseki Mitsubishi GUIDE RAIL Replenish when

TETOLA OIL 68 SHOWA SHELL

FEBIS K68 EXXON

Use recommended coolant.

The following coolants are recommended:

Even when recommended coolant is used, it may adversely affect

Be careful not to cause a fire.